Sony DVD VCR Combo RDR VX555 User Manual

3-096-485-11(1)  
Video Cassette Recorder/  
DVD Recorder  
US  
ES  
Operating Instructions  
Manual de instrucciones  
RDR-VX555  
© 2007 Sony Corporation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
For customers in the U.S.A  
Owner’s Record  
The model and serial numbers are located  
at the rear of the unit.  
Record the serial number in the space  
provided below. Refer to them  
whenever you call upon your Sony dealer  
regarding this product.  
WARNING  
Precautions  
To reduce the risk of fire or  
electric shock, do not expose  
this apparatus to rain or  
moisture.  
To avoid electrical shock, do not  
open the cabinet. Refer servicing  
to qualified personnel only.  
The AC power cord must be  
changed only at a qualified  
service shop.  
On safety  
Should any solid object or liquid fall  
into the cabinet, unplug the recorder  
and have it checked by qualified  
personnel before operating it any  
further.  
Model No. RDR-VX555  
Serial No.______________  
CAUTION  
You are cautioned that any change or  
modifications not expressly approved  
in this manual could void your  
On power sources  
• Operate the recorder only on  
120 V AC, 60 Hz.  
authority to operate this equipment.  
CAUTION  
• The recorder is not disconnected  
from the AC power source as long  
as it is connected to the wall outlet,  
even if the recorder itself has been  
turned off.  
• Install this system so that the  
power cord can be unplugged from  
the wall socket immediately in the  
event of trouble.  
• If you are not going to use the  
recorder for a long time, be sure to  
disconnect the recorder from the  
wall outlet. To disconnect the AC  
power cord, grasp the plug itself;  
never pull the cord.  
The use of optical instruments with this  
product will increase eye hazard. As  
the laser beam used in this DVD  
recorder is harmful to eyes, do not  
attempt to disassemble the cabinet.  
Refer servicing to qualified personnel  
only.  
Note  
This equipment has been tested and  
found to comply with the limits for a  
Class B digital device, pursuant to Part  
15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are  
designed to provide reasonable  
protection against harmful interference  
in a residential installation. This  
equipment generates, uses, and can  
radiate radio frequency energy and, if  
not installed and used in accordance  
with the instructions, may cause  
harmful interference to radio  
communications. However, there is no  
guarantee that interference will not  
occur in a particular installation. If this  
equipment does cause harmful  
interference to radio or television  
reception, which can be determined by  
turning the equipment off and on, the  
user is encouraged to try to correct the  
interference by one or more of the  
following measures:  
VISIBLE AND INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM  
DANGER  
CLASS 3B VISIBLE AND INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN. AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO THE BEAM.  
CAUTION  
KLASSE 3B SICHTBARE UND UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG WENN GEÖFFNET. DIREKTEN KONTAKT MIT DEM  
VORSICHT  
STRAHL VERMEIDEN.  
SYNLIG OG USYNLIG LASERSTRÅLING AF KLASSE 3B VED ÅBNING. UNDGÅ DIREKTE UDSÆTTELSE FOR STRÅLING.  
ADVARSEL  
SYNLIG OG USYNLIG LASERSTRÅLING KLASSE 3B NÅR DEKSEL ÅPNES. UNNGÅ DIREKTE EKSPONERING FOR STRÅLEN.  
I
ADVARSEL  
VARNING  
KLASS 3B SYNLIG OCH OSYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING NÄR DENNA DEL ÄR ÖPPNAD. UNDVIK ATT DIREKT EXPONERA DIG  
FÖR STRÅLNINGEN.  
AVATTUNA LUOKAN 3B NÄKYVÄÄ JA NÄKYMÄTÖNTÄ LASERSÄTEILYÄ. VÄLTÄ SUORAA ALTISTUMISTA SÄTEELLE.  
VARO!  
This label is located on the laser  
protective housing inside the  
enclosure.  
On placement  
• Place the recorder in a location  
with adequate ventilation to  
prevent heat build-up in the  
recorder.  
• If the recorder is brought directly  
from a cold to a warm location, or  
is placed in a very damp room,  
moisture may condense on the  
lenses inside the recorder and  
cause damage to the video head,  
tape, and the optical block. Should  
this occur, the recorder may not  
operate properly. When you first  
install the recorder, or when you  
move it from a cold to a warm  
location, remove the disc and tape  
and leave the recorder turned on  
for about three hours before  
operating the recorder.  
– Reorient or relocate the receiving  
antenna.  
– Increase the separation between the  
equipment and receiver.  
– Connect the equipment into an outlet  
on a circuit different from that to  
which the receiver is connected.  
– Consult the dealer or an experienced  
radio/TV technician for help.  
This symbol is intended  
to alert the user to the  
presence of uninsulated  
“dangerous voltage”  
within the product’s  
enclosure that may be of sufficient  
magnitude to constitute a risk of  
electric shock to persons.  
This symbol is intended  
to alert the user to the  
presence of important  
operating and  
maintenance (servicing)  
instructions in the literature  
accompanying the appliance.  
• Do not place the recorder on a soft  
surface such as a rug that might  
block the ventilation holes.  
• Do not place the recorder in a  
confined space such as a bookshelf  
or similar unit.  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
• Do not place the recorder in a  
location near heat sources, or in a  
place subject to direct sunlight,  
excessive dust, or mechanical  
shock.  
• Do not place the recorder in an  
inclined position. It is designed to  
be operated in a horizontal  
position only.  
• Keep the recorder, discs, and  
cassettes away from equipment  
with strong magnets, such as  
microwave ovens, or large  
loudspeakers.  
• Do not place heavy objects on the  
recorder.  
• To prevent fire or shock hazard, do  
not place objects filled with  
liquids, such as vases, on the  
apparatus.  
• When you move the recorder, take  
out any discs. If you do not, the  
disc may be damaged.  
10) Protect the power cord from  
being walked on or pinched  
particularly at plugs,  
Copy guard function  
Since the recorder has a copy guard  
function, programs received through  
an external tuner (not supplied) may  
contain copy protection signals  
(copy guard function) and as such  
may not be recordable, depending  
on the type of signal.  
convenience receptacles, and the  
point where they exit from the  
apparatus.  
11) Only use attachments/  
accessories specified by the  
manufacturer.  
12) Use only with the cart, stand,  
tripod, bracket, or table specified  
by the manufacturer, or sold  
with the apparatus. When a cart  
is used, use caution when  
moving the cart/apparatus  
combination to avoid injury  
from tip-over.  
IMPORTANT NOTICE  
Caution: This recorder is capable  
of holding a still video image or  
on-screen display image on your  
television screen indefinitely. If  
you leave the still video image or  
on-screen display image displayed  
on your TV for an extended period  
of time you risk permanent  
damage to your television screen.  
Plasma display panels and  
projection televisions are  
especially susceptible to this.  
13) Unplug this apparatus during  
lightning storms or when unused  
for long periods of time.  
If you have any questions or  
problems concerning your recorder,  
please consult your nearest Sony  
dealer.  
On recording  
14) Refer all servicing to qualified  
service personnel. Servicing is  
required when the apparatus has  
been damaged in any way, such  
as power-supply cord or plug is  
damaged, liquid has been spilled  
or objects have fallen into the  
apparatus, the apparatus has  
been exposed to rain or  
• Contents of the recording cannot  
be compensated for if the  
recording or playback is not made  
due to a malfunction of the  
recorder, disc, etc.  
IMPORTANT SAFETY  
INSTRUCTIONS  
1) Read these instructions.  
2) Keep these instructions.  
3) Heed all warnings.  
4) Follow all instructions.  
5) Do not use this apparatus near  
water.  
6) Clean only with dry cloth.  
7) Do not block any ventilation  
openings. Install in accordance  
with the manufacturer’s  
• Make trial recordings before  
making the actual recording.  
Copyrights  
moisture, does not operate  
normally, or has been dropped.  
• Television programs, films, video  
tapes, discs, and other materials  
maybe copyrighted. Unauthorized  
recording of such material may be  
contrary to the provisions of the  
copyright laws. Also, use of this  
recorder with cable television  
transmission may require  
instructions.  
8) Do not install near any heat  
sources such as radiators, heat  
registers, stoves, or other  
apparatus (including amplifiers)  
that produce heat.  
9) Do not defeat the safety purpose  
of the polarized or grounding-  
type plug. A polarized plug has  
two blades with one wider than  
the other. A grounding type plug  
has two blades and a third  
grounding prong. The wide  
blade or the third prong are  
provided for your safety. If the  
provided plug does not fit into  
your outlet, consult an  
authorization from the cable  
television transmitter and/or  
program owner.  
• This product incorporates  
copyright protection technology  
that is protected by U.S. patents  
and other intellectual property  
rights. Use of this copyright  
protection technology must be  
authorized by Macrovision, and is  
intended for home and other  
limited viewing uses only unless  
otherwise authorized by  
electrician for replacement of  
the obsolete outlet.  
Macrovision. Reverse engineering  
or disassembly is prohibited.  
,continued  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About this manual  
Icon  
Meaning  
• Instructions in this manual describe the controls on the  
remote. You can also use the controls on the recorder if  
they have the same or similar names as those on the  
remote.  
Functions available for DVD+RWs  
+
RW  
• The on-screen display illustrations used in this manual  
may not match the graphics displayed on your TV  
screen.  
• The explanations regarding discs in this manual refer to  
discs created on this recorder. The explanations do not  
apply to discs that are created on other recorders and  
played back on this recorder.  
Functions available for DVD-RWs  
in VR (Video Recording) mode  
-
RWVR  
Functions available for DVD-RWs  
in video mode  
-
RWVideo  
Functions available for DVD+Rs  
+
R
Functions available for DVD-Rs in  
VR (Video Recording) mode  
-
RVR  
Functions available for DVD-Rs in  
video mode  
-
RVideo  
Functions available for DVD  
VIDEOs  
DVD  
Functions available for DVD-RAMs  
RAM  
VCD  
Functions available for VIDEO CDs  
or CD-Rs/CD-RWs in video CD  
format  
Functions available for music CDs  
or CD-Rs/CD-RWs in music CD  
format  
CD  
Functions available for DATA CDs  
(CD-ROMs/CD-Rs/CD-RWs  
containing MP3* audio tracks or  
JPEG image files)  
DATA CD  
Functions available for DATA  
DVDs (DVD-ROMs/DVD+RWs/  
DVD-RWs/DVD+Rs/DVD-Rs  
containing MP3* audio tracks or  
JPEG image files)  
DATA DVD  
Functions available for VHS  
VIDEOs  
* MP3 (MPEG1 Audio Layer 3) is a standard format  
defined by ISO/MPEG which compresses audio data.  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
DVD Operation  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VCR Operation  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
What is a Video Cassette Recorder/DVD Recorder?  
This is a DVD recorder with built-in VHS video deck, and allows recording/playback of DVD discs and  
VHS tapes. DVD editing is also possible.  
Recording and timer recording  
One Touch Dubbing - DVD y VHS  
Record TV programs on a DVD or VHS tape,  
either manually or using the timer. You need to  
connect a tuner such as a cable box to this  
recorder.  
Dub in either direction between a DVD disc and  
VHS tape with the simple press of a button.  
Note that copy-protected signals will not be  
recorded.  
VIDEO  
DVD  
Easy selection between DVD and  
VCR  
Control your cable box or satellite  
receiver - Set top box control  
Simply press the DVD or VIDEO button to select  
the media format you want to use.  
Connect the supplied set top box controller to have  
the recorder change the channel of your cable box  
or satellite receiver (page 12).  
DVD  
VIDEO  
CH 103!  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
103  
VIDEO  
DVD  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Quick access to recorded titles -  
Title List  
Display the Title List to view all titles on a disc  
and select a title for playback or editing.  
One Touch Dubbing - DV/D8 Dubbing  
Connect your digital video camera to the DV IN  
jack and press the ONE-TOUCH DUBBING  
button to dub a DV/D8 format tape over to a disc.  
Control  
Title List (Original)  
10:10 AM  
1/4  
No. Title  
Length Edit  
01 LINE 1  
02 LINE 1  
03 LINE 1  
01:29:03  
00:31:23  
01:59:00  
00:58:56  
>
>
>
>
04 LINE 1  
Dubbing  
T
LINE  
1
ONE-TOUCH  
DUBBING  
May/02/2007  
08:00 PM  
Creating your own program - Playlist  
Record a program on a DVD-RW (VR mode) or  
DVD-R (VR mode), then erase, move or add  
scenes as you like without changing the original  
contents.  
Original  
Playlist  
Operation restrictions  
Possible Simultaneous Operations  
Current Operation  
VCR  
VCR  
Recording  
DVD  
Playback  
DVD  
Recording  
Playback  
*1  
Playing a VHS tape  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
*3  
Recording on a VHS tape  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
*2  
Playing a DVD  
Yes  
No  
*3  
Recording on a DVD  
Yes  
No  
*1  
*2  
*3  
When pressing DVD, VCR playback stops.  
When pressing VIDEO, DVD playback stops.  
Only for timer recording. You can also record from LINE1 and LINE2 at the same time.  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A
“Title List”  
Displays the list of the disc contents,  
including the recording information and  
movie thumbnail image, which allows you to  
select a title to play or edit.  
How to Use the On-Screen  
Menus  
The following three displays are mainly used to  
operate this recorder. Once you become familiar  
with the basic operations, you will find the  
recorder easy to use.  
Title List (Original)  
10:10 AM  
1/4  
No. Title  
Length Edit  
01 LINE 1  
02 LINE 1  
03 LINE 1  
01:29:03  
00:31:23  
01:59:00  
00:58:56  
>
>
>
>
04 LINE 1  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
T
LINE  
1
May/02/2007  
08:00 PM  
SYSTEM  
MENU  
B
C
D
E
F
“Timer”  
M/m/</,,  
Used to set a new timer recording for a disc or  
VHS tape, as well as change or cancel the  
timer recordings you set.  
ENTER  
O RETURN  
OPTIONS  
“Edit”  
Used to create or edit a Playlist (unfinalized  
DVD-RWs (VR mode)/DVD-Rs (VR mode)  
only).  
“Dubbing”  
Used to dub from a disc to a VHS tape and  
vice versa, and also dub from a DV/D8 format  
tape to a disc.  
System Menu  
“Disc Setting”  
The System Menu appears when you press  
SYSTEM MENU, and provides entries to all of  
the recorder’s main functions, such as timer  
recording and setup.  
Used to rename, protect, format, or finalize a  
disc, or erase all titles on the disc. Also,  
displays the disc information.  
Select an option by pressing M/m and ENTER.  
“Setup”  
Displays the “Setup” display for setting up the  
recorder to suit your preferences.  
Title List (Original)  
Title List  
10:10 AM  
Press ENTER :  
Timer  
Edit  
Title Menu for DVD Title List.  
Dubbing  
Disc Setting  
Setup  
6
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Selectable options  
Sub-menu  
Selectable options on the System Menu differ  
depending on the media type, disc condition, and  
operating status.  
The sub-menu appears when you select an item  
from a list menu (e.g., a title from the Title List  
menu), and press ENTER. The sub-menu displays  
options applicable only to the selected item. The  
displayed options differ depending on the  
situation and disc type.  
Example: When a disc or a VHS tape is stopped.  
Type  
Selectable option  
+
RW  
Select an option by pressing M/m and ENTER.  
*1  
-
RWVR  
Example: The Title List menu  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
-
RWVideo  
Title List (Original)  
10:10 AM  
1/4  
No. Title  
Length Edit  
*1  
*1  
*1  
+
R
01 LINE 1  
02 LINE 1  
03 LINE 1  
Play  
Title Erase  
-
RVR  
Chapter Erase  
04 LINE 1  
Protect  
-
RVideo  
Title Name  
A·B Erase  
Divide Title  
T
LINE 1  
May/02/2007  
08:00 PM  
DVD  
Options for the selected item  
RAM  
VCD  
CD  
OPTIONS  
The OPTIONS menu appears when you press  
OPTIONS. You can search for a title/chapter/  
track, check the playing and remaining time, or  
change settings for audio/angle/subtitle. The  
displayed options differ depending on the media  
type.  
DATA CD  
DATA DVD  
*2  
Press M/m to select an option, press </, to  
select the desired item, and press ENTER.  
*1  
*2  
Unfinalized disc only  
With a disc inserted  
Example: When you press OPTIONS while a  
DVD VIDEO is playing.  
To return to the previous display  
Press O RETURN.  
DVD  
VIDEO  
Notes  
Title 1/4  
T
• The OPTIONS menu may not appear during DVD  
recording.  
Chapter 1/1  
C
Time 00:00:25  
• The System Menu does not appear when recording on  
a DVD, or dubbing from VHS tape to a DVD.  
• You cannot use the DVD or VIDEO buttons with the  
System Menu turned on.  
ENG Dolby D2ch (1/1)  
00:01:30  
Audio  
Remain  
Subtitle  
Angle  
2/2 ENG  
1/1  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Step 2: Connecting the  
Cable Box/Satellite  
Receiver (Tuner)  
Hookups and Settings  
Hooking Up the Recorder  
Follow steps 1 to 7 to hook up and adjust the  
settings of the recorder.  
This recorder does not include a TV tuner.  
To record TV programs on this recorder, you need  
to connect the recorder to a tuner that has audio/  
video output jacks.  
Notes  
• Plug cords securely to prevent unwanted noise.  
• See the instructions supplied with the components to be  
connected.  
• You cannot connect this recorder to a TV that does not  
have a video input jack.  
If you have been using your VCR connected to an  
antenna, connect this recorder to your VCR using  
an audio/video cord. In this way, you will be able  
to record TV programs.  
• Be sure to disconnect the power cord of each  
component before connecting. Do not connect the  
power cord until you reach “Connecting the Power  
You cannot record on this recorder if you have:  
– a cable box or satellite receiver without audio/  
video outputs.  
– cable with no cable box.  
– antenna only (no cable TV).  
In the cases above, contact your cable service or  
satellite service company to see if they can  
provide you with a compatible cable box or  
satellite receiver.  
Step 1: Unpacking  
Check that you have the following items:  
• Audio/video cord  
(phono plug × 3 y phono plug × 3) (1)  
• Remote commander (remote) (1)  
• Set top box controller (1)  
Using the cable box/satellite  
receiver control function  
• Size AA (R6) batteries (2)  
This function allows the recorder to control a  
cable box or satellite receiver via the supplied set  
top box controller. You can also use the recorder’s  
remote control to change channels on the cable  
box/satellite receiver whenever the cable box/  
satellite receiver and the recorder are turned on.  
To use the cable box/satellite receiver control  
function, you need to:  
– Check the brand code of your cable box/satellite  
– Connect the set top box controller (page 13).  
– Set the brand code number and the recorder’s  
input that is connected to the cable box/satellite  
receiver (page 23).  
After setting up the cable box/satellite receiver  
control, check that the recorder can correctly  
control the cable box or satellite receiver  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Connecting a cable box/satellite receiver and set top box controller  
Connect the LINE IN jacks using an audio/video cord.  
With this hookup, you can record any channel on the cable box or satellite receiver. Be sure that the cable  
box or satellite receiver is turned on. This connection is necessary to use the Synchro-Rec function  
To watch cable or satellite programs, you need to match the input source on the recorder (L1) to the input  
jack connected to the cable box or satellite receiver (LINE 1 IN).  
Place the set top box controller near the remote sensor on the cable box/satellite receiver.  
Wall  
Set top box  
controller  
(supplied)  
Cable box/  
satellite receiver  
Antenna cable  
(not supplied)  
AUDIO  
OUT  
R
VIDEO  
OUT  
ANT IN  
TO TV  
L
to antenna input  
TV  
Audio/video cord  
(not supplied)  
LINE  
1
IN  
VIDEO  
to SET TOP BOX  
CONTROL  
SETTOP  
BOX  
CONTROL  
AUDIO  
to LINE 1 IN  
VCR-DVD recorder  
COMPONENT  
AUDIO OUT  
S
VIDEO OUT LINE  
1
IN LINE OUT  
VIDEO  
VIDEO OUT  
VIDEO  
L
Y
L
R
P
P
B
SETTOP  
BOX  
HDMI OUT  
CONTROL  
R
R
OPTICAL COAXIAL  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT  
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
: Signal flow  
About AV path through  
This recorder automatically sends the input signal from the LINE 1 IN jacks to the LINE OUT VIDEO/  
AUDIO jacks without turning itself on.  
When you connect a cable box or satellite receiver to the LINE 1 IN jacks and your TV to the LINE OUT  
(VIDEO/AUDIO L/R) jacks (page 15), you can watch programs from a cable box or satellite receiver on  
the TV even when the recorder is turned off.  
,continued  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Notes  
• Synchro-Recording does not work with some tuners. For details, see the tuner’s operating instructions.  
• AV path through function does not work for:  
– Input signals from the LINE 2 IN jacks.  
– Output signals to S VIDEO OUT, COMPONENT VIDEO OUT, or HDMI OUT jacks.  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Step 3: Connecting to Your TV  
Connect the supplied audio/video cord to the LINE OUT (VIDEO/AUDIO L/R) jacks of the recorder.  
To enjoy higher quality images, connect an S video cord (not supplied) instead of the yellow (video) plug.  
When using this connection, be sure to connect the audio cord to the LINE OUT (AUDIO L/R) jacks.  
INPUT  
INPUT  
TV or projector  
AUDIO  
S VIDEO  
R
L
VIDEO  
(red)  
(white) (yellow)  
Audio/video cord  
(supplied)  
S VIDEO OUT LINE 1 IN LINE OUT  
VIDEO VIDEO  
S video cord  
(not supplied)  
(yellow)  
(white)  
(red)  
L
R
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
to LINE OUT  
to S VIDEO OUT  
(VIDEO/AUDIO L/R)  
VCR-DVD recorder  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO OUT  
AUDIO OUT  
S
VIDEO OUT LINE  
1
IN LINE OUT  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
Y
L
R
P
P
B
R
SETTOP  
BOX  
HDMI OUT  
CONTROL  
R
OPTICAL COAXIAL  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT  
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
: Signal flow  
When playing “wide screen” images  
Some recorded images may not fit your TV screen. To change the picture size, see page 96.  
Notes  
• Do not connect to the S VIDEO OUT and yellow LINE OUT (VIDEO) jacks at the same time.  
• During DVD recording, you cannot watch VHS pictures by pressing VIDEO, as the S VIDEO OUT jack will output  
DVD video signals only.  
• Do not connect your TV’s audio output jacks to the LINE IN (AUDIO L/R) jacks at the same time. This will cause  
unwanted noise to come from your TV’s speakers.  
,continued  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
If your TV has an HDMI input jack  
Connect the HDMI* OUT jack using a certified HDMI cord (not supplied). You will enjoy high quality  
picture and sound. The HDMI indicator lights up on the front panel when the recorder outputs signals  
through the HDMI OUT jack.  
Be sure to turn off the recorder before connecting an HDMI cord.  
TV or  
projector  
HDMI IN  
to HDMI input  
HDMI cord (not supplied)  
HDMI OUT  
to HDMI OUT  
VCR-DVD recorder  
COMPONENT  
AUDIO OUT  
S
VIDEO OUT LINE  
1
IN LINE OUT  
VIDEO  
VIDEO OUT  
Y
VIDEO  
L
L
R
P
P
B
SETTOP  
BOX  
HDMI OUT  
CONTROL  
R
R
OPTICAL COAXIAL  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT  
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
: Signal flow  
* This DVD recorder incorporates High-Definition Multimedia Interface (HDMI™) technology.  
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI  
Licensing LLC.  
Notes  
• You cannot connect the HDMI OUT jack to DVI jacks that are not HDCP compliant (e.g., DVI jacks on PC displays).  
• During DVD recording, you cannot watch VHS pictures by pressing VIDEO, as the HDMI OUT jack will output  
DVD video signals only.  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
If your TV has component video input jacks  
Connect the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks using a component video cord (not supplied) or three  
video cords (not supplied) of the same kind and length. You will enjoy accurate color reproduction and  
high quality images.  
If your TV accepts progressive 480p format signals, you must use this connection and then set  
“Progressive” of “Video” to “On” in the “Setup” display (page 97).  
When using this connection, be sure to connect the audio cord to the LINE OUT (AUDIO L/R) jacks.  
COMPONENT VIDEO IN  
INPUT  
AUDIO  
TV or projector  
L
R
Y
PB  
PR  
(green) (blue)  
(red)  
(white)  
(red)  
Audio/video cord  
(supplied)  
Component video cord  
(not supplied)  
COMPONENT  
LINE OUT  
VIDEO  
VIDEO OUT  
(green)  
Y
(white)  
(red)  
(blue)  
(red)  
L
PB  
PR  
R
to LINE OUT  
(AUDIO L/R)  
to COMPONENT  
VIDEO OUT  
AUDIO  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO OUT  
AUDIO OUT  
S
VIDEO OUT LINE  
1
IN LINE OUT  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
Y
L
R
P
P
B
R
SETTOP  
BOX  
HDMI OUT  
CONTROL  
R
OPTICAL COAXIAL  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT  
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
VCR-DVD recorder  
: Signal flow  
Note  
During DVD recording, you cannot watch VHS pictures by pressing VIDEO, as the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks  
will output DVD video signals only.  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Step 4: Connecting to Your AV Amplifier (Receiver)  
Select one of the following patterns A or B, according to the input jack on your AV amplifier (receiver).  
This will enable you to listen to DVD audio tracks through your AV amplifier (receiver).  
A
AUDIO OUT  
Audio cord  
(white) (not supplied)  
INPUT  
(white)  
(red)  
L
L
AUDIO  
R
R
(red)  
AV amplifier (receiver)  
VCR-DVD recorder  
to AUDIO OUT (L/R)  
COMPONENT  
AUDIO OUT  
S
VIDEO OUT LINE  
1
IN LINE OUT  
VIDEO  
VIDEO OUT  
VIDEO  
L
Y
L
R
PB  
SETTOP  
BOX  
HDMI OUT  
CONTROL  
P
R
R
OPTICAL COAXIAL  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT  
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
to DIGITAL AUDIO OUT  
(COAXIAL or OPTICAL)  
HDMI OUT  
OPTICAL COAXIAL  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT  
to HDMI OUT  
Coaxial digital cord  
(not supplied)  
Optical digital cord  
(not supplied)  
HDMI cord  
(not supplied)  
or  
or  
to coaxial or  
optical digital  
input  
to HDMI input  
[Speakers]  
Rear (L)  
[Speakers]  
Rear (R)  
B
Front (L)  
Center  
Front (R)  
AV amplifier (receiver)  
with a decoder  
Subwoofer  
: Signal flow  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A Connecting to audio L/R jacks  
This connection uses a stereo amplifier’s  
(receiver’s) two front speakers for sound.  
B Connecting to a digital audio input jack  
Use this connection if your AV amplifier  
*1  
*2  
(receiver) has a Dolby Digital or DTS decoder  
and a digital input jack. You can enjoy the  
surround effect of Dolby Digital (5.1ch) or DTS  
(5.1ch).  
You can enjoy the surround function that creates  
virtual speakers from two stereo speakers. Select  
“Surround1,” “Surround2,” or “Surround3” in  
“Surround” of “Audio” setup (page 99).  
Surround 1  
Surround 2  
Surround 3  
*1  
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.  
“Dolby” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of  
Dolby Laboratories.  
“DTS” and “DTS Digital Out” are trademarks of DTS,  
Inc.  
*2  
z Hints  
• For correct speaker location, see the operating  
instructions supplied with the connected components.  
• During VHS playback, the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT  
jacks can also output digital audio signals.  
Notes  
• During DVD recording, the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT  
jacks or HDMI OUT jack output DVD audio signals  
only. You cannot hear VHS sound by pressing VIDEO.  
• After you have completed the connection, make the  
appropriate settings under “Audio Connection Setup”  
in Easy Setup (page 23). Otherwise, no sound or a loud  
noise will come from your speakers.  
• With a coaxial or optical digital connection, you cannot  
use the virtual surround effects of this recorder.  
• When outputting from the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT  
jacks, you cannot switch the bilingual sounds on a  
DVD-RW (VR mode) or DVD-R (VR mode) by  
pressing AUDIO.  
• When you connect the recorder to an AV amplifier  
(receiver) using an HDMI cord, you will need to do one  
of the following:  
Virtual speaker  
Note  
Make sure that your listening position is between and at  
an equal distance from your speakers, and that the  
speakers are located in similar surroundings.  
– Connect the AV amplifier (receiver) to the TV with  
an HDMI cord.  
– Connect the recorder to the TV with a video cord  
other than HDMI cord (component video cord,  
S VIDEO cord, or audio/video cord).  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Step 5: Connecting the  
Power Cord  
Step 6: Preparing the  
Remote  
Plug the recorder and TV power cords into an AC  
outlet. After you connect the power cord, you  
must wait for a short while before  
operating the recorder. You can operate the  
recorder only after the front panel display lights up  
and the recorder enters standby mode.  
You can control the recorder using the supplied  
remote.  
Insert two size AA (R6) batteries by matching the  
3 and # ends on the batteries to the markings  
inside the battery compartment. Be sure to close  
the battery cover properly. When using the  
If you connect additional equipment to this  
recorder (page 27), be sure to connect the power  
cord only after all connections are complete.  
remote, point it at the remote sensor  
recorder.  
on the  
COMPONENT  
AUDIO OUT  
VIDEO OUT  
L
Y
P
P
R
B
R
SETTOP  
BOX  
HDMI OUT  
CONTROL  
OPTICAL COAXIAL  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT  
to AC outlet <  
Notes  
• If the supplied remote interferes your other Sony DVD  
recorder or player, change the command mode number  
for this recorder (page 22).  
• Use the batteries correctly to avoid possible leakage  
and corrosion. Do not touch the liquid with bare hands  
should leakage occur. Observe the following:  
– Do not use a new battery with an old battery, or  
batteries of different manufacturers.  
– Do not attempt to recharge the batteries.  
– If you do not intend to use the remote for an extended  
period of time, remove the batteries.  
– If battery leakage occurs, wipe out any liquid inside  
the battery compartment, and insert new batteries.  
• Do not expose the remote sensor (marked  
on the  
front panel) to strong light, such as direct sunlight or  
lighting apparatus. The recorder may not respond to the  
remote.  
• With normal use, the batteries should last about three to  
six months.  
• Do not leave the remote in an extremely hot or humid  
place.  
• Do not drop any foreign object into the remote casing,  
particularly when replacing the batteries.  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
TV INPUT  
Switch your TV’s input  
source  
Controlling TVs with the remote  
You can adjust the remote control’s signal to  
control your TV.  
TV DIGITAL/  
ANALOG  
Select the broadcast on a  
Sony TV that can switch  
between digital and  
analog  
Notes  
• Depending on the TV, some or all of the buttons below  
may not work for the TV.  
• If you enter a new code number, the code number  
previously entered will be erased.  
• When you replace the batteries of the remote, the code  
number may be reset to the default setting. Set the  
appropriate code number again.  
Code numbers of controllable TVs  
If more than one code number is listed, try  
entering them one at a time until you find the one  
that works with your TV.  
Manufacturer  
Sony  
Code number  
01 (default)  
04  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
Number  
buttons  
Akai  
AOC  
04  
Centurion  
Coronado  
Curtis-Mathes  
Daewoo  
Daytron  
Fisher  
12  
03  
12, 14  
04, 22  
03, 12  
11  
TV DIGITAL/  
ANALOG  
General Electric  
Hitachi  
04, 06, 10  
02, 03, 04  
04, 10, 12  
09  
TV "/1  
TV INPUT  
TV VOL +/–  
TV CH +/–  
J.C.Penney  
JVC  
KMC  
03  
1 Hold down TV "/1 located at the bottom of  
the remote.  
LG/Gold Star  
Magnavox  
Marantz  
MGA/Mitsubishi  
NEC  
03, 04, 17  
03, 04, 08, 12, 21  
04, 13  
Do not press "/1 at the top of the remote.  
2 With TV "/1 pressed down, enter your  
TV’s manufacturer code (see below) using  
the number buttons.  
04, 12, 13, 17  
04, 12  
Panasonic  
Philco  
06, 19  
3 Release TV "/1.  
02, 03, 04, 08  
08, 21  
The following buttons are for TV.  
Philips  
Press  
To  
Pioneer  
06, 16  
TV "/1  
Turn your TV on or off  
Portland  
Proscan  
03  
TV VOL +/–  
Adjust the volume of  
your TV  
10  
Quasar  
06, 18  
TV CH +/–  
Select the channel on  
your TV  
Radio Shack  
RCA  
05, 10, 14  
04, 10  
,continued  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2 Press SYSTEM MENU.  
Manufacturer  
Sampo  
Samsung  
Sanyo  
Code number  
12  
The System Menu appears.  
3 Select “Setup,” and press ENTER.  
03, 04, 12, 20  
11, 14  
Setup  
No Disc  
10:10 AM  
Title List  
Clock Set  
Video  
Scott  
12  
Timer  
Audio  
Sears  
07, 10, 11  
03, 05, 18  
08, 12  
Edit  
Features  
Options  
Easy Setup  
Sharp  
Dubbing  
Disc Setting  
Setup  
Sylvania  
Teknika  
Toshiba  
Wards  
03, 08, 14  
07, 18  
4 Select “Options,” and press ENTER.  
03, 04, 12  
12  
Options  
10:10 AM  
No Disc  
Yorx  
Title List  
Language  
Zenith  
14, 15  
Parental  
Timer  
Front Display  
Command Mode  
Factory Setting  
:
:
Auto  
Edit  
DVD 3  
Dubbing  
Disc Setting  
Setup  
If you have a Sony DVD player or  
more than one Sony DVD recorder  
If the supplied remote interferes with your other  
Sony DVD recorder or player, set the command  
mode number for this recorder and the supplied  
remote to one that differs from the other Sony  
DVD recorder or player, after you have completed  
“Step 7: Easy Setup.”  
5 Select “Command Mode,” and press  
ENTER.  
Options  
10:10 AM  
No Disc  
Title List  
Language  
The default command mode setting for this  
recorder and the supplied remote is DVD 3.  
Parental  
Timer  
Front Display  
Command Mode  
Factory Setting  
:
:
Auto  
Edit  
DVD 1  
Dubbing  
Disc Setting  
Setup  
DVD 2  
DVD 3  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
6 Select a command mode (“DVD 1,” “DVD  
2,” or “DVD 3”), and press ENTER.  
SYSTEM  
MENU  
M/m/</,,  
ENTER  
O RETURN  
1 Check that Easy Setup (page 23) has been  
finished. If Easy Setup has not been  
finished, first perform Easy Setup.  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
7 Set the command mode for the remote so it  
matches the command mode for the  
recorder you set above.  
Step 7: Easy Setup  
Follow the steps below to set the command  
mode on the remote.  
Follow the steps below to make the minimum  
number of basic adjustments for using the  
recorder. If you do not complete Easy Setup, it  
will appear each time you turn on your recorder.  
Settings are made in the following order.  
A Hold down ENTER.  
B While holding down ENTER, enter the  
command mode code number using the  
number buttons.  
OSD Language Setup  
m
Command Mode Code number  
DVD1  
DVD2  
DVD3  
number button 1  
number button 2  
number button 3  
Cable Box/Sat. Control Setup  
m
Clock Setup  
C Hold down both the number buttons and  
ENTER at the same time for more than  
three seconds.  
m
TV Type Setup  
m
Audio Connection Setup  
To return to the previous display  
Press O RETURN.  
m
Finished!  
To check the command mode for the recorder  
Press x (stop) on the recorder when the recorder  
is turned off. The command mode for the recorder  
appears in the front panel display.  
"/1  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
Number  
buttons  
If the command mode for the recorder has not  
been changed, set the command mode for the  
remote to the default setting of DVD3. If the  
command mode for the remote is changed to  
DVD1 or DVD2, you will be unable to operate  
this recorder.  
M/m/</,,  
ENTER  
O RETURN  
1 Turn on the TV.  
2 Press "/1.  
The recorder turns on.  
,continued  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
3 Switch the input selector on your TV so that  
the signal from the recorder appears on  
your TV screen.  
Easy Setup  
No Disc  
Enter the brand code of  
your set top box.  
“Initial setting necessary to operate the DVD  
recorder will be made. You can change them  
later using setup.” appears.  
• If this message does not appear, select “Easy  
Setup” in the “Setup” display to run Easy  
Setup (page 104).  
OK  
Cancel  
4 Press ENTER.  
• To re-enter the code number, select  
“Cancel” and return to step 6.  
The setup display for selecting the language  
used in the on-screen display appears.  
8 Select “OK,” and press ENTER.  
Easy Setup  
No Disc  
Easy Setup  
No Disc  
Select the screen language.  
Select the input line that you  
connected the set top box to.  
English  
Français  
Español  
Line1  
Line2  
5 Select a language, and press ENTER.  
The setup display for cable box/satellite  
receiver control appears.  
9
Select the recorder’s audio/video input  
(“Line1” or “Line2”) that is connected to  
the cable box/satellite receiver, and press  
ENTER.  
Easy Setup  
No Disc  
The setup display for clock setting appears.  
Do you want to control  
your set top box with this recorder?  
(Changes to the current setting will  
erase all timer settings.)  
Easy Setup  
No Disc  
12:00 AM  
Yes  
No  
Set the time and date manually.  
Month Day  
Year  
01  
01  
2007  
Mon  
Hour  
12  
Min  
00  
AM/PM  
AM  
:
6 Select whether or not you use the cable  
box/satellite receiver control, and press  
ENTER.  
10Press M/m to set the month and press ,.  
Set the day, year, hour, minutes, and AM/PM  
in the same way, then press ENTER. The day  
of the week is set automatically.  
If you want to use the cable box/satellite  
receiver control (page 12), select “Yes.”  
If not, select “No,” then go to step 10.  
The setup display for selecting the picture size  
of the connected TV appears.  
7 Press the number buttons to enter the  
brand code of your cable box/satellite  
receiver.  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
11 Select the setting that matches your TV  
type.  
14 Press ENTER.  
The setup display for selecting the type of  
DTS signal appears.  
Easy Setup  
10:10 AM  
No Disc  
Easy Setup  
10:10 AM  
No Disc  
Select your TV screen type.  
DTS  
16 : 9  
4 : 3 Letter Box  
4 : 3 Pan Scan  
On  
Off  
“16:9”: For wide-screen TVs or standard TVs  
with a wide screen mode.  
15 Select whether or not you want to send a  
DTS signal to your amplifier (receiver),  
and press ENTER.  
“4:3 Letter Box”: For standard TVs.  
Displays “wide screen” pictures with bands  
on the upper and lower sections of the screen.  
“4:3 Pan Scan”: For standard TVs.  
Automatically displays “wide screen”  
pictures on the entire screen and cuts off the  
sections that do not fit.  
If your AV amplifier (receiver) has a DTS  
decoder, select “On.” Otherwise, select “Off.”  
16 Press ENTER when “Finish” appears.  
Easy Setup is finished. All connections and  
setup operations are complete.  
If you use the cable box/satellite receiver  
control, check that the control works correctly  
12 Press ENTER.  
The setup display for selecting the type of  
Dolby Digital signal appears.  
Easy Setup  
10:10 AM  
No Disc  
Easy Setup  
10:10 AM  
No Disc  
Easy Setup is finished.  
Dolby Digital  
D-PCM  
Dolby Digital  
Finish  
13 Select the type of Dolby Digital signal you  
want to send to your amplifier (receiver).  
If your AV amplifier (receiver) has a Dolby  
Digital decoder, select “Dolby Digital.”  
Otherwise, select “D-PCM.”  
To return to the previous display  
Press O RETURN.  
z Hint  
If you want to run Easy Setup again, select “Easy Setup”  
in the “Setup” display (page 104).  
Note  
To record TV programs using the timer, you must set the  
clock accurately.  
,continued  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
2
Affix it so that the set top box controller is  
near the remote control sensor on your cable  
box/satellite receiver.  
Checking the cable box/satellite  
receiver control setting  
1 Turn on the recorder and the cable box/  
satellite receiver.  
2 Point the recorder’s remote at the recorder  
(not at the cable box/satellite receiver).  
3 Press CH +/– and check that the channel  
changes on the cable box/satellite receiver  
window.  
4 Press the number buttons and check that  
the channel changes on the cable box/  
satellite receiver window.  
If you cannot get the recorder to control your  
cable box/satellite receiver  
Check the settings at “Set Top Box Control” in  
“Features” setup (page 101).  
Check the connection and place the set top box  
controller near the cable box/satellite receiver  
If your cable box or satellite receiver still does not  
operate with this recorder, contact your cable or  
satellite company to see if they can provide you  
with a compatible cable box or satellite receiver.  
To fix the set top box controller to your cable  
box/satellite receiver  
Once you have confirmed that the set top box  
controller controls your cable box or satellite  
receiver, affix it in place.  
1
Attach the supplied double-sided tape to the  
set top box controller.  
Remove the backings on the double-sided  
tape.  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Connecting Another VCR or Similar Device  
After disconnecting the recorder’s power cord from an AC outlet, connect the other VCR or similar  
recording device to the LINE IN jacks of this recorder. See also the instruction manual supplied with the  
connected equipment.  
If you connect equipment that has a timer function, you can use the Synchro Rec function (pages 51 and  
80). In this case, connect the equipment to the LINE 1 IN jacks (page 13).  
Connecting to the LINE 2 IN jacks on the front panel  
Connect other VCR or similar device to the LINE 2 IN jacks of this recorder. If the equipment has an  
S video jack, you can use an S video cord (not supplied) instead of the yellow (video) plug of the audio/  
video cord. Do not connect to the S VIDEO and yellow VIDEO jacks at the same time.  
You can connect a second DVD player and record DVDs.  
Other VCR, etc.  
OUTPUT  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
S VIDEO  
L
R
S video cord  
(not supplied)  
Audio/video cord  
(not supplied)  
LINE  
VIDEO  
2
IN  
L
S
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
(MONO)  
R
DV IN  
to LINE 2 IN  
VCR-DVD recorder  
: Signal flow  
z Hints  
• When the connected equipment outputs only monaural sound, connect an audio cord to the white LINE IN AUDIO L  
(mono) jack.  
• To record from connected equipment, select an input source (LINE1 or LINE2) to match the jack you connected to  
,continued  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Notes  
• Do not connect more than one type of video cord between the recorder and your TV at the same time.  
• Pictures containing copy protection signals that prohibit any copying cannot be recorded. You cannot dub from DVD  
VIDEOs to this recorder.  
• Do not connect the output jack of this recorder to another equipment’s input jack with the other equipment’s output  
jack connected to the input jack of this recorder. Noise (feedback) may result.  
• If you pass the recorder signals via the VCR, you may not receive a clear image on your TV screen.  
VCR-DVD recorder  
VCR  
TV  
Be sure to connect your VCR to the VCR-DVD recorder and your TV in the order shown below. To watch video tapes,  
watch the tapes through a second line input on your TV.  
Line input 1  
VCR  
VCR-DVD recorder  
TV  
Line input 2  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Quick Guide to Disc Types  
Recordable and Playable Discs  
Icon used  
in this  
manual  
Disc  
Logo  
Formatting  
(new discs)  
Compatibility with other  
DVD players (finalizing)  
Disc Type  
Playable on DVD+RW  
compatible players  
(automatically finalized)  
Automatically  
formatted  
DVD+RW  
VR  
+
RW  
Playable only on VR mode  
compatible players (finalization  
unnecessary) (page 88)  
*2  
Format in VR mode  
-
RWVR  
mode  
DVD-  
RW  
Playable on most DVD players  
(finalization necessary)  
Video  
mode  
Format in Video  
*2  
-
RWVideo  
DVD+R  
Playable on DVD+R compatible  
players (finalization necessary)  
Automatically  
formatted  
+
R
DVD+R DL  
VR  
Format in VR mode  
using the “Disc Setting” mode compatible players  
Playable only on DVD-R VR  
-
RVR  
mode  
(finalization necessary) (page 88)  
DVD-  
R
Automatically  
formatted in Video  
mode  
Playable on most DVD players  
(finalization necessary)  
Video  
mode  
-
RVideo  
“DVD+RW,” “DVD-RW,” “DVD+R,” “DVD+R DL,”  
and “DVD-R” logos are trademarks.  
Usable disc versions (as of December 2006)  
• 8×-speed or slower DVD+RWs  
• 6×-speed or slower DVD-RWs (Ver.1.1, Ver.1.2  
*1  
with CPRM  
)
• 16×-speed or slower DVD+Rs  
• 16×-speed or slower DVD-Rs (Ver.2.0, Ver.2.1  
with CPRM)  
• 8×-speed or slower DVD+R DL (Double Layer)  
*6  
discs  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Recording Features  
Editing Features  
Change  
Title  
Name  
Erase  
Title/  
Chapter  
Auto  
Rewrite  
A-B  
Erase  
Divide  
Title  
Playlist  
Chapter  
*3  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes/No  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
Yes  
No  
*4  
Yes/Yes  
*3  
Yes/No  
Yes/No  
Yes/Yes  
*5  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
No  
*5  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
No  
*5  
Yes/No  
*1  
*2  
*3  
CPRM (Content Protection for Recordable Media) is  
a coding technology that protects copyrights for  
images.  
Unused DVD-RWs are automatically formatted  
according to the setting of “Format DVD-RW” in  
“Features” setup (page 101).  
Erasing titles only frees up disc space if you erase the  
last title.  
Erasing titles or chapters frees up disc space.  
Erasing titles or chapters does not free up disc space.  
When using DVD+R DL (Double Layer) discs, see  
the instructions supplied with the discs.  
*4  
*5  
*6  
,continued  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12 cm/8 cm discs  
12 cm  
Playback  
8 cm  
Recording  
Disc Type  
DVD+RW  
Recording  
Yes  
Playback  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
No  
VR mode  
Yes  
Yes  
DVD-RW  
Video mode  
VR mode  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
DVD-R  
DVD+R  
Video mode  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
Discs that cannot be recorded on  
• 8 cm discs  
• DVD-RAMs  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playable Discs  
Icon Used  
in This  
Manual  
Disc Type  
DVD VIDEO  
DVD-RAM  
Disc Logo  
Characteristics  
Discs such as movies that can be purchased or  
rented  
DVD  
RAM  
DVD-RAMs recorded by another recording  
device. 12 cm discs without cartridges, or  
removable from their cartridges can be played.  
VIDEO CDs or CD-Rs/CD-RWs in VIDEO CD  
format (with PBC function)  
VIDEO CD  
CD  
VCD  
CD  
Music CDs or CD-Rs/CD-RWs in music CD  
format that can be purchased  
CD-ROMs/CD-Rs/CD-RWs created on a PC or  
similar device in music format, or MP3 or JPEG  
format that conforms to ISO9660* Level 1/  
Level 2  
DATA CD  
DATA CD  
DATA DVD  
DVD-ROMs/DVD+RWs/DVD-RWs/DVD+Rs/  
DVD-Rs in MP3 or JPEG format conforming to  
Universal Disk Format (UDF)  
DATA DVD  
8 cm DVD+RWs, DVD-RWs, and DVD-Rs  
recorded with a DVD video camera (Still images  
recorded with a DVD video camera cannot be  
played.)  
8 cm DVD+RW/  
DVD-RW/DVD-R  
“DVD VIDEO” and “CD” logos are trademarks.  
Discs that cannot be played  
• CD-ROMs/CD-Rs/CD-RWs that are not  
recorded in music CD or Video CD format, or do  
not contain MP3 audio tracks or JPEG image  
files.  
* A logical format of files and folders on DATA-CDs,  
defined by ISO (International Organization for  
Standardization).  
• Data part of CD-Extras  
• DVD-ROMs that are not recorded in DVD  
Video format, or do not contain MP3 audio  
tracks or JPEG image files.  
• DVD Audio discs  
• HD layer on Super Audio CDs  
• DVD VIDEOs with a different region code  
• A disc recorded in a color system other than  
NTSC, such as PAL or SECAM  
,continued  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Note on playback operations of DVD VIDEOs/  
VIDEO CDs  
Note on DVD+RWs/DVD+Rs, DVD-RWs/DVD-  
Rs, or CD-RWs/CD-Rs recorded on other  
equipment  
Some DVD+RWs/DVD+Rs, DVD-RWs/DVD-  
Rs, or CD-RWs/CD-Rs cannot be played on this  
recorder due to the recording quality or physical  
condition of the disc, or the characteristics of the  
recording device and authoring software. The disc  
will not play if it has not been correctly finalized.  
For more information, see the operating  
instructions for the recording device.  
Some playback operations of DVD VIDEOs/  
VIDEO CDs may be intentionally set by software  
producers. Since this recorder plays DVD  
VIDEOs/VIDEO CDs according to the disc  
contents the software producers designed, some  
playback features may not be available. Also, see  
the instructions supplied with the DVD VIDEOs/  
VIDEO CDs.  
Note on DualDiscs  
A DualDisc is a two sided disc product which  
mates DVD recorded material on one side with  
digital audio material on the other side.  
However, since the audio material side does not  
conform to the Compact Disc (CD) standard,  
playback on this product is not guaranteed.  
Notes  
• You cannot mix VR mode and Video mode on the same  
DVD-RW or DVD-R. To change the DVD-RW’s  
format, reformat the disc (page 67). Note that a disc’s  
contents will be erased after reformatting.  
• You cannot shorten the time required for recording  
even with high-speed discs. Also, you cannot record on  
the disc if the disc is not 1x speed compatible.  
• It is recommended that you use discs with “For Video”  
printed on their packaging.  
• You cannot add new recordings to DVD-RWs (Video  
mode), DVD+Rs, or DVD-Rs (Video mode) recorded  
on other equipment.  
• You may not be able to further record on a DVD+RW  
recorded on other equipment. Note that recording on  
such discs may cause the recorder to rewrite the DVD  
menu.  
Region code (DVD VIDEO only)  
Your recorder has a region code printed on the rear  
of the unit and will only play DVD VIDEOs  
(playback only) labeled with identical region  
codes. This system is used to protect copyrights.  
DVD VIDEOs labeled  
recorder.  
will also play on this  
ALL  
If you try to play any other DVD VIDEO, a  
message will appear on the TV screen to indicate  
that the disc is not playable. Depending on the  
DVD VIDEO, no region code indication may be  
labeled even though playing the DVD VIDEO is  
prohibited by area restrictions.  
• If the disc contains PC data unrecognizable by this  
recorder, the data may be erased.  
RDR-VX555  
NO.  
X
Region code  
Music discs encoded with copyright protection  
technologies  
This product is designed to playback discs that  
conform to the Compact Disc (CD) standard.  
Recently, various music discs encoded with  
copyright protection technologies are being  
marketed by some record companies. Please be  
aware that among those discs, there are some that  
do not conform to the CD standard and may not be  
playable by this product.  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
z Hints  
• You can play DATA CDs or DATA DVDs with MP3  
audio tracks or JPEG image files (pages 41 or 42).  
• If you insert a DVD VIDEO, VIDEO CD, or CD,  
playback starts automatically depending on the disc.  
• When playing a DVD+RW, DVD-RW, DVD+R,  
DVD-R, and DVD-RAM, you can select the title from  
the Title List menu (page 39).  
DVD Playback  
Playing Discs  
+
RW  
-
-
+
R
-
-
RVideo  
RWVR RWVideo  
RVR  
• When using a DVD-RAM with a cartridge, remove the  
disc from the cartridge.  
DVD RAM VCD  
CD  
DATA CD DATA DVD  
Z OPEN/  
CLOSE  
Notes  
DVD  
• To play a disc recorded with other equipment on this  
recorder, finalize the disc on the recording equipment  
first.  
1
2
5
8
0
3
4
7
6
9
• For simultaneous VHS and DVD operation, see page 9.  
TOP MENU  
MENU  
Using the DVD’s Menu  
+
RW  
-
+
R
-
RVideo  
RWVideo  
DVD  
When you play a DVD VIDEO, or a finalized  
DVD+RW, DVD-RW (Video mode), DVD+R, or  
DVD-R (Video mode), you can display the disc’s  
menu by pressing TOP MENU or MENU.  
H PLAY  
x STOP  
1 Press DVD to operate the DVD recorder.  
2 Press Z OPEN/CLOSE, and place a disc on  
the disc tray.  
Playback side facing down  
3 Press Z OPEN/CLOSE to close the disc  
tray.  
Wait until “LOAD” disappears from the front  
panel display.  
4 Press H PLAY.  
Playback starts.  
To stop playback  
Press x STOP.  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Playback Options  
Z OPEN/CLOSE  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
Number buttons  
ANGLE  
MENU  
SUBTITLE  
AUDIO  
M/m/</,,  
ENTER  
O RETURN  
ADVANCE  
. PREV  
REPLAY/  
> NEXT  
H PLAY  
x STOP  
X PAUSE  
Button  
Operation  
Disc  
Z OPEN/CLOSE  
AUDIO  
Stops playing and opens the disc tray.  
All discs  
Selects one of the audio tracks recorded on the disc  
when pressed repeatedly.  
-
-
RVR  
RWVR  
DVD  
VCD  
-
-
: Selects the main or sub sound.  
RWVR  
RVR  
: Selects the audio source.  
DVD  
: Selects stereo or monaural audio tracks.  
VCD  
.
SUBTITLE  
ANGLE  
Selects a subtitle language when pressed repeatedly.  
DVD  
DVD  
Selects an angle when pressed repeatedly.  
If various angles (multi-angles) for a scene are  
recorded on the disc, “  
display.  
” appears in the front panel  
REPLAY/  
ADVANCE  
• Replays or briefly fast forwards a scene when  
pressed during playback.  
• Goes to the previous or next frame when pressed  
during pause mode.  
+
-
-
RWVR RWVideo  
RW  
-
-
RVideo  
+
RVR  
R
RAM  
DVD  
. PREV/  
NEXT >  
• Goes to the beginning of the current or next title/  
chapter/scene/track and starts playback when  
pressed during playback.  
All discs  
• Goes to the beginning of the previous title/chapter/  
scene/track when .PREV is pressed within three  
seconds after starting a title/chapter/scene/track.  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Button  
Operation  
Disc  
Fast reverses or fast forwards the disc when pressed  
during playback.  
Search speed changes with each press:  
All discs  
(fast reverse/fast  
forward)  
*1  
FF1 with sound  
(Scan Audio) is  
available for DVDs  
with Dolby Digital  
soundtracks.  
FR2 and FF2 are not  
available for MP3.  
FR3 and FF3 are only  
available for DVDs  
and VIDEO CDs.  
fast reverse fast forward  
*1  
FR1 T t FF1  
*2  
*2  
FR2 T T t t FF2  
*3  
*3  
*2  
*3  
FR3 T T T t t t FF3  
Plays in slow motion when pressed in pause mode.  
Playback speed changes with each press:  
+
-
-
RWVR RWVideo  
RW  
(slow)  
-
-
RVideo  
+
RVR  
R
*
reverse slow motion forward slow motion  
RAM VCD  
DVD  
T
t
* Playback direction  
only  
T T t t  
T T T t t t  
X PAUSE  
Pauses playback.  
All discs  
If you pause playback for more than five minutes,  
playback starts automatically.  
To resume normal playback after playing at various speeds, press H PLAY.  
z Hints  
Notes on playing DTS soundtracks on a CD  
• You can change playback options, such as subtitle,  
audio track, angle, etc., using the OPTIONS menu  
When playing DTS-encoded CDs, excessive noise  
will be heard from the analog stereo jacks. To  
avoid possible damage to the audio system, the  
consumer should take proper precautions when  
the analog stereo jacks of the recorder are  
connected to an amplification system. To enjoy  
DTS Digital Surround™ playback, an external  
5.1-channel decoder system must be connected to  
the digital jack of the recorder.  
• During playback or pause mode, the recorder’s m/  
M buttons and the remote’s .PREV/>NEXT  
buttons work the same way (page 36). Hold the buttons  
down during playback to fast forward or fast reverse. In  
pause mode, you can play in slow motion. Three speeds  
are available, depending on the duration of the press.  
the meaning of the language abbreviation.  
Notes on playing DVDs with a DTS soundtrack  
DTS audio signals are output only through the  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (COAXIAL or  
OPTICAL)/HDMI OUT jack.  
When you play a DVD with DTS soundtracks, set  
“Digital Out” – “DTS” to “On” of “Audio” in the  
“Setup” display (page 98).  
Notes  
• If you pause playback of a CD, or DATA CD/DATA  
DVD containing MP3 audio tracks, playback will not  
start until you press H PLAY or X PAUSE.  
• Sound will be interrupted during Scan Audio  
If you connect the recorder to audio equipment  
without a DTS decoder, do not set “DTS” to “On”  
in “Audio” setup. A loud noise (or no sound) may  
come out from the speakers, which might disturb  
your ears or cause damage to the speakers.  
,continued  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
– you edit the title after stopping playback.  
– you make a recording.  
Playing quickly with sound (Scan  
Audio) (DVDs with Dolby Digital soundtracks  
only)  
Playing restricted DVDs (Parental  
Control)  
You can play quickly with dialog or sound during  
FF1 fast-forward of a DVD with Dolby Digital  
soundtracks. Simply press M during playback.  
DVD  
If you play a restricted DVD, a message appears  
asking whether you want to override the  
restriction.  
z Hint  
To turn off the Scan Audio function, set “Scan Audio” of  
“Audio” to “Off” in the “Setup” display (page 99).  
1
Select “OK” and press ENTER.  
The display for entering your password  
appears.  
Note  
Sound will be interrupted during Scan Audio.  
2
Enter your four digit password using the  
number buttons.  
Playing VIDEO CDs with PBC  
functions  
The recorder starts playback.  
To register or change the password, see “Parental  
VCD  
PBC (Playback Control) allows you to play  
VIDEO CDs interactively using a menu on your  
TV screen.  
When you start playing a VIDEO CD with PBC  
functions, a menu appears.  
Locking the recorder (Child Lock)  
You can lock all of the buttons on the recorder so  
that the settings are not canceled by mistake.  
Select an item using the number buttons and press  
ENTER. Then follow the instructions in the menu  
(press H PLAY when “Press SELECT”  
appears).  
Operations differ depending on the disc. See the  
instructions supplied with the disc.  
To cancel PBC Playback  
Press MENU to display “Menu: Off.” To use the  
PBC functions, press MENU again to display  
“Menu:On.”  
With the recorder turned on and stopped, hold  
down x (stop) on the recorder for more than ten  
seconds. The recorder turns off and “CHILD  
LOCK” appears in the front panel display. The  
indicator remains lit if there is a timer setting. The  
recorder will not work except for timer recordings.  
Resuming playback from the point  
where you stopped the disc (Resume  
Play)  
Press H PLAY again after stopping a disc to  
resume playback from the same point.  
To start from the beginning, press x STOP twice,  
and press H PLAY.  
To unlock the recorder, hold down x on the  
recorder until “CHILD LOCK” disappears from  
the front panel display. The recorder is unlocked  
and turns on.  
To stop timer recording while the recorder is  
locked, press x twice. The recording stops and the  
recorder is unlocked.  
The point where you stopped playing is cleared  
when:  
– you open the disc tray.  
– you play another title.  
Note  
The recorder will be unlocked when:  
– you stop timer recording by pressing x.  
– you insert a tape.  
– you switch the Title List menu to original or  
Playlist (DVD-RW (VR mode)/DVD-R (VR  
mode)/DVD-RAM only).  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
4 Select the title, and press ENTER.  
The sub-menu appears.  
Playing a Title From the  
Title List  
5 Select “Play,” and press ENTER.  
Playback starts from the selected title on the  
disc.  
-
-
RVideo  
+
-
-
+
R
RVR  
RWVR RWVideo  
RW  
RAM  
The Title List menu displays the program titles on  
the disc.  
About the Title List for DVD-RWs (VR mode)  
and DVD-Rs (VR mode)  
You can switch the Title List to show an original  
or Playlist.  
DVD  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
While the Title List menu is turned on, press  
ORIGINAL/PLAYLIST repeatedly to select  
either “Title List (Original)” or “Playlist.”  
TOP MENU  
MENU  
ORIGINAL/  
PLAYLIST  
TITLE LIST  
M/m/</,,  
ENTER  
To turn off the Title List  
Press TITLE LIST.  
z Hint  
You can also switch the Title List of DVD-RAMs to  
show an original or Playlist.  
Notes  
1 Press DVD to operate the DVD recorder.  
2 Place a disc on the disc tray.  
• The Title List does not appear for DVD-RWs (Video  
mode), DVD+Rs, or DVD-Rs (Video mode) that have  
been finalized. To view a title, press TOP MENU or  
• The Title List may not appear for discs created on other  
DVD recorders.  
3 Press TITLE LIST.  
Example: DVD-RW (VR mode)  
• Letters that cannot be displayed are replaced with “ .”  
1
*
Title List (Original)  
10:10 AM  
4
3
1/4  
No. Title  
Length Edit  
01 LINE 1  
02 LINE 1  
03 LINE 1  
01:29:03  
00:31:23  
01:59:00  
00:58:56  
>
>
>
>
2
3
04 LINE 1  
T
LINE  
1
May/02/2007  
08:00 PM  
A Disc type:  
Displays a disc type.  
Also displays the title type (original or  
Playlist) for DVD-RWs (VR mode),  
DVD-Rs (VR mode), and DVD-RAMs.  
B Movie thumbnail image  
C Title information:  
Displays the title number, title name,  
recording date, and recording mode.  
” indicates a protected title, while  
” indicates unprotected.  
D Clock  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
4 Press ENTER.  
The recorder starts playback from the selected  
point.  
Searching for a Title/  
Chapter/Track, etc.  
To turn off the display, press OPTIONS.  
-
-
RVideo  
+
-
-
+
R
RVR  
RWVR RWVideo  
RW  
DVD RAM VCD  
Notes  
You can search a DVD by title or chapter, and  
VIDEO CD by track or scene. As titles and tracks  
are assigned individual numbers on the disc, select  
the title or track by entering its number. You can  
also search for a scene using the time code.  
• Depending on the disc, you may not be able to use the  
OPTIONS menu to search for a title/chapter/track, or  
enter the time code for a playback point.  
• When playing a Playlist title, you may not be able to  
search for a scene using the time code.  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
Number  
buttons  
M/m/</,,  
ENTER  
OPTIONS  
1 Press OPTIONS during playback.  
The OPTIONS menu appears.  
2 Select a search method.  
“Title” (for DVDs)  
“Chapter” (for DVDs)  
“Track” (for VIDEO CDs with PBC function  
off)  
“Time” (for DVDs/VIDEO CDs with PBC  
function off): Searches for a starting point  
using the time code.  
3
Press  
M
/
m
/
<
/
,
to select the number of  
the title, chapter, track, etc., you want, or  
press the number buttons to enter the time  
code.  
For example: “Time”  
To find a scene at 2 hours, 5 minutes, and 20  
seconds, enter “20520.”  
If you make a mistake, wait a moment until  
the display returns to the elapsed playing time  
display, then select another number.  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
If you insert a DATA CD/DATA DVD  
containing only MP3 audio tracks, the  
“Music” display appears. Go to step 4.  
Playing MP3 Audio Tracks  
and JPEG Image Files  
3 Select “Music,” and press ENTER.  
The “Music” display appears.  
DATA DVD  
DATA CD  
4 Select an album, and press ENTER.  
You can play DATA CDs (CD-ROMs/CD-Rs/  
CD-RWs)/DATA DVDs (DVD-ROMs/  
Music  
10:10 AM  
DVD+RWs/DVD-RWs/DVD+Rs/DVD-Rs) that  
contain MP3 audio tracks or JPEG image files.  
Surround:Off  
Stop 00:00:00  
MP3_001  
0/9  
Prev Directory  
01-Track1.mp3  
02-Track2.mp3  
03-Track3.mp3  
04-Track4.mp3  
05-Track5.mp3  
DVD  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
TOP MENU  
5 Select a track, and press ENTER.  
Playback starts from the selected track.  
When a track or album is being played, the  
title is shown in a box.  
M/m/</,,  
ENTER  
OPTIONS  
O RETURN  
./>  
H PLAY  
To stop playback  
Press x STOP.  
x STOP  
X PAUSE  
To pause playback  
Press X PAUSE.  
To restart playback, press H PLAY or X  
PAUSE.  
Playing MP3 audio tracks  
You can play MP3 audio tracks on DATA CDs or  
DATA DVDs.  
To return to the previous display  
Press O RETURN.  
1 Press DVD to operate the DVD recorder.  
To switch between MP3 audio tracks and JPEG  
image files  
Press x STOP, and press TOP MENU.  
2 Place a DATA CD/DATA DVD on the disc  
tray.  
When you insert a DATA CD/DATA DVD  
containing MP3 audio tracks and JPEG image  
files, the display for selecting a media type  
appears. When you select “Mix,” you can  
enjoy a slide show with sound (page 43).  
z Hint  
When playback of all the MP3 audio tracks within the  
album finishes, the recorder stops.  
10:10 AM  
Music  
Press ENTER :  
Photo  
Music menu for this disc.  
Mix  
,continued  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
: Rotates the image (page 42).  
: Zooms the image (page 42).  
Press OPTIONS to turn on/off the menu  
icons.  
Playing JPEG image files  
You can play JPEG image files on DATA CDs or  
DATA DVDs.  
1 Press DVD to operate the DVD recorder.  
To play the slide show  
2 Place a DATA CD/DATA DVD on the disc  
1
Press </, to select “  
ENTER.  
,” and press  
tray.  
When you insert a DATA CD/DATA DVD  
containing MP3 audio tracks and JPEG image  
files, the display for selecting a media type  
appears. When you select “Mix,” you can  
enjoy a slide show with sound (page 43).  
The “Slideshow Speed” menu appears.  
”: Slow  
”: Normal  
”: Fast  
2
Press </, to select the desired play speed,  
and press ENTER.  
10:10 AM  
Music  
The slide show starts from the selected image.  
To stop playing, press x STOP.  
Press ENTER :  
Photo  
Music menu for this disc.  
Mix  
To rotate the selected image  
Press </, to select “  
,” and press ENTER.  
Each time you press ENTER, the image turns  
clockwise by 90°.  
If you insert a DATA CD/DATA DVD  
containing only JPEG image files, the  
“Photo” display appears. Go to step 4.  
To zoom in an image  
Press </, to select “  
Each time you press ENTER, the magnification  
changes as follows:  
2× t 4× t 2× t normal  
,” and press ENTER.  
3 Select “Photo,” and press ENTER.  
The “Photo” display appears.  
4 Select a folder, and press ENTER.  
To return to the previous display  
Press O RETURN.  
Directory information  
Photo  
10:10 AM  
To switch between MP3 audio tracks and JPEG  
image files  
Press x STOP, and press TOP MENU.  
Slideshow  
\\abc\defg  
z Hint  
You can also start the slide show by pressing H PLAY  
in step 5 above.  
Page 1 / 2  
Notes  
To display the previous or next page, press  
• You cannot use M/m/</, to move the image within  
the screen while zooming.  
./>.  
• Slide show can play in only one direction.  
• You cannot rotate or zoom during slide show.  
5 Select an image file, and press ENTER.  
The selected image is displayed over the  
entire screen.  
If you select “  
in the rotated image display,  
the images in the “Photo” display will not be  
rotated.  
To display the previous or next image, press  
./>.  
The following menu icons appear in the upper  
part of the screen.  
: Returns to the “Photo” display.  
: Starts the slide show (page 42).  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Enjoying a slide show with sound  
When a disc contains both MP3 audio tracks and  
JPEG image files, you can enjoy a slide show with  
sound.  
About MP3 audio tracks and JPEG  
image files  
MP3 is audio compression technology that  
satisfies the ISO/IEC MPEG regulations.  
JPEG is image compression technology.  
You can play back DATA CDs (CD-ROMs/CD-  
Rs/CD-RWs) or DATA DVDs (DVD-ROMs/  
DVD+RWs/DVD-RWs/DVD+Rs/DVD-Rs)  
recorded in MP3 (MPEG1 Audio Layer 3) and  
JPEG format.  
However, this recorder only plays DATA CDs  
whose logical format is ISO9660 Level 1/Level 2  
or Joliet, and DATA DVDs of Universal Disk  
Format (UDF).  
1 Press DVD to operate the DVD recorder.  
2 Insert a DATA CD/DATA DVD containing  
both the MP3 audio tracks and JPEG image  
files.  
The display for selecting a media type  
appears.  
10:10 AM  
Music  
Press ENTER :  
Photo  
See the instructions supplied with the disc drives  
and the recording software (not supplied) for  
details on the recording format.  
Music menu for this disc.  
Mix  
Note  
The recorder may not be able to play some DATA CDs  
or DATA DVDs created in the Packet Write format.  
3 Select “Mix,” and press ENTER.  
MP3 audio tracks or JPEG image files that the  
recorder can play  
The “Music” display appears.  
4 Select an album, and press ENTER.  
The recorder can play the following tracks and  
files:  
5 Select a track, and press ENTER.  
Playback starts from the selected track, and  
the display asks for confirmation.  
– MP3 (MPEG1 Audio Layer 3) audio tracks.  
– MP3 audio tracks with the extension “.MP3.”  
– JPEG image files with the extension “.JPEG” or  
“.JPG.”  
6 Select “Yes,” and press ENTER.  
The “Photo” display appears.  
z Hints  
• If you add numbers (01, 02, 03, etc.) to the front of the  
file names, the files will be played in that order.  
• Since a disc with many trees takes longer to start  
playback, it is recommended that you create albums  
with no more than two trees.  
7 Select the folder you want to view, and  
press ENTER.  
8 Press H PLAY to start the slide show.  
The “Slideshow Speed” menu appears.  
9 Press </, to select the slide show  
speed, and press ENTER.  
The slide show starts with sound.  
To stop the slide show  
Press x STOP.  
z Hints  
• When playing JPEG images, you can also use the on-  
screen menu. For details, see “Playing JPEG image  
• The slide show is played repeatedly until MP3  
playback stops.  
,continued  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Notes  
Displaying the Playing Time  
and Play Information  
• Some DATA CDs or DATA DVDs cannot be played  
on this recorder depending on file format.  
• Only one session of a multi-session DATA DVD can  
be played back.  
• Only alphabet and numbers can be used for album or  
track names. Anything else is displayed as an asterisk.  
• The recorder will play any data with the extension  
“.MP3,” even if they are not in MP3 format. Playing  
such data may generate a loud noise which could  
damage your speaker system.  
+
RW  
-
-
+
R
-
-
RVR  
RVideo  
RWVR RWVideo  
DVD RAM VCD  
DATA CD DATA DVD  
CD  
You can check disc information, such as playing  
time, recording mode, and remaining disc space.  
• The recorder does not conform to audio tracks in  
MP3PRO format.  
• The recorder can recognize up to 499 MP3 audio tracks  
within a single album. The recorder may not recognize  
some discs depending on the recording device used for  
recording or the disc condition.  
• The recorder can play MP3 audio tracks recorded in the  
following sampling frequencies: 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz,  
48 kHz.  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
TIME/TEXT  
DISPLAY  
• ID3 tags cannot be displayed.  
• If you add the extension “.JPG” or “.JPEG” to data not  
in JPEG format, a message appears indicating that the  
format is not supported.  
• Depending on the disc or the size of image files,  
playback may take some time to start.  
• The recorder can recognize up to 999 JPEG image files  
within a single folder. The recorder may not recognize  
some discs depending on the recording device used for  
recording or the disc condition.  
Press DISPLAY.  
The information display appears.  
Each time you press the button, the display  
changes as follows:  
Disc and tape information/date and time  
• Progressive and lossless compression JPEG image files  
are not supported.  
m
Disc information only  
• The image size that the recorder can display is limited  
to width 32 - 7680 pixels by height 32 - 8192 pixels.  
• JPEG image files that conform to the DCF* image file  
format are not supported.  
m
No display  
* “Design rule for Camera File system”: Image standards  
for digital cameras regulated by JEITA (Japan  
Electronics and Information Technology Industries  
Association).  
Play  
Stop  
0:05:30  
HQ  
0:30:00  
SP  
Rem 00:25  
Original  
Rem 01:30  
Line1  
Wed May 02. 2007  
10:10 AM  
DVD  
A Playing status  
B Playing time  
C Recording mode  
D Remaining disc space (in stop mode)  
Remaining time of the current title (during  
*1  
playback  
)
*2  
E Input source  
F Date and time  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
*1  
*2  
Also appears in stop mode with Resume Play  
activated (page 38).  
Title type (original or Playlist) for DVD-RWs (VR  
mode)/DVD-Rs (VR mode)/DVD-RAMs.  
Viewing information on the front  
panel display  
You can view the information on the front panel  
display.  
Press TIME/TEXT repeatedly.  
The displays differ depending on the disc type or  
playing status.  
Example: When playing a DVD  
Playing time of the current title  
Current title number and current chapter  
number  
Clock  
Example: When a DVD is stopped  
Clock  
m
Current title and chapter number  
m
Remaining disc space  
m
Input source  
Example: When playing a CD  
Playing time of the current track  
m
Current track number  
m
Clock  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Recording mode and recording time  
The following table is an approximate guide for  
the recording time on a single DVD (4.7 GB).  
DVD Recording  
Recording mode  
Approximate  
recording time  
(minute)  
Before Recording  
Before you start recording…  
HQ (High quality)  
60  
• This recorder can record on various disc types.  
Select the disc type according to your needs  
• Check that the disc has enough available space  
for the recording (page 44). For DVD+RWs or  
DVD-RWs, you can free up disc space by  
erasing titles (page 57).  
• Check that the recorder is connected to a tuner  
such as a cable box or satellite receiver  
(page 12). See also the tuner’s instruction  
manual.  
HSP  
R
90  
SP (Standard mode)  
120  
150  
180  
240  
360  
480  
LSP  
ESP  
LP  
r
r
r
r
EP  
SLP (Long duration)  
z Hint  
The approximate recording time for DVD+R DL  
(Double Layer) discs is as follows:  
HQ: 1 hour 48 minutes  
z Hint  
To play a disc recorded with this recorder on other  
equipment, finalize the disc (page 88).  
HSP: 2 hours 42 minutes  
SP: 3 hours 37 minutes  
LSP: 4 hours 31 minutes  
Notes  
• Timer recordings will start with or without the recorder  
turned on. The recorder automatically turns off after a  
recording has finished.  
ESP: 5 hours 25 minutes  
LP: 7 hours 14 minutes  
EP: 10 hours 51 minutes  
• This recorder records at ×1 speed.  
SLP: 14 hours 28 minutes  
Notes  
Recording mode  
• When in a recording mode other than HQ, the recorder  
compresses the audio/video data before recording.  
Since the compression rate needs to decrease for fast-  
moving images or if picture noise is present, recorded  
data size increases, and available recording time  
becomes shorter. When recording such pictures, a  
recording mode offering longer recording time is  
recommended.  
• Situations below may cause inaccuracies with the  
recording time.  
– Recording fast-moving or images containing picture  
noise.  
Like the SP or EP recording mode of VCRs, this  
recorder has eight different recording modes.  
Select a recording mode according to the time and  
picture quality you need. For example, if picture  
quality is your top priority, select “HQ” (high  
quality). If recording time is your priority, “SLP”  
can be a possible choice.  
Press REC MODE repeatedly to switch the  
recording modes.  
– Recording a program with poor reception, or a  
program or video source of low picture quality  
– Recording on a disc that has already been edited  
– Recording only a still picture or just sound  
• Since the recording mode for recorded titles is  
calculated after sampling the recorded data during  
playback, it may be displayed differently from the  
mode you selected when recording. However, the  
actual recording itself is correctly made in the selected  
mode.  
I want to record with the  
best possible picture  
quality, so I’ll select HQ.  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Recording main and sub sounds  
DVD Recording From  
Connected Equipment  
Without the Timer  
You can record the different soundtracks on a  
DVD-RW (VR mode) or DVD-R (VR mode) from  
equipment connected to the LINE 1 IN or LINE 2  
IN jacks. When playing the disc, you can select  
main or sub sound by pressing the AUDIO button.  
Set “Line Audio Input” in “Audio” setup to  
“Main/Sub” in the Setup Display (page 100).  
When recording on other discs, select either sound  
track with the connected equipment before  
recording.  
+
RW  
-
-
+
R
-
-
RVideo  
RWVR RWVideo  
RVR  
You can record TV programs on the recorder  
through the connected cable box/satellite receiver.  
Z OPEN/  
CLOSE  
DVD  
VIDEO  
CH +/–  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
Unrecordable pictures  
INPUT  
Pictures with copy protection cannot be recorded  
on this recorder. Recording stops when a copy  
guard signal is detected.  
DISPLAY  
Copy control  
signals  
Recordable discs  
Copy-Free  
+
RW  
-
-
RWVR RWVideo  
H PLAY  
-
-
RVideo  
+
R
RVR  
x STOP  
X PAUSE  
REC MODE  
Copy-Once  
-
RWVR  
z REC  
Ver.1.1, Ver.1.2 with CPRM*  
-
RVR  
Ver.2.0, Ver.2.1 with CPRM*  
Copy-Never  
None  
* The recorded disc can be played only on CPRM  
compatible equipment (page 30).  
1 Turn on the recorder and the connected  
cable box/satellite receiver.  
Formatting a new disc  
New, unformatted discs are automatically  
formatted when first inserted in the recorder.  
For DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs, you can select a  
recording format (VR mode or Video mode)  
according to your needs (page 30).  
2 Press DVD to operate the DVD recorder.  
3 Press Z OPEN/CLOSE, and place a  
recordable disc on the disc tray.  
• Unused DVD-RWs are automatically formatted  
according to the setting of “Format DVD-RW”  
in “Features” setup (page 101).  
• Unused DVD-Rs are automatically formatted in  
Video mode. To format in VR mode, change the  
recording format using the “Disc Setting”  
display (page 67).  
Recording side facing down  
Notes  
4 Press Z OPEN/CLOSE to close the disc  
tray.  
• You cannot mix VR mode and Video mode on the same  
DVD-RW or DVD-R.  
• You can change the recording format on DVD-RWs by  
reformatting (page 67).  
• You cannot change the recording format on used DVD-  
Rs.  
• The recorder records on new DVD-Rs in Video mode  
unless you first format the discs in VR mode.  
Wait until “LOAD” disappears from the front  
panel display.  
Unused discs are automatically formatted. For  
the DVD-RW/DVD-R’s recording format  
(VR mode or Video mode), see “Formatting a  
,continued  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
5 Press CH +/– or INPUT repeatedly to select  
the channel or input source you want to  
record.  
Notes  
• Recording may not start immediately after z REC is  
pressed.  
• When using the cable box/satellite receiver  
control, select the channel by pressing  
CH +/– on this recorder’s remote. The  
recorder’s input is switched to the connected  
input (LINE1 or LINE2). You can also use  
the number buttons.  
• You cannot change the recording mode during  
recording or recording pause.  
• If there is a power failure, the program you are  
recording may be erased.  
• You cannot change the input source during recording.  
• When not using the cable box/satellite  
receiver control, select the connected input  
(LINE1 or LINE2) by pressing INPUT, and  
then select the channel on the cable box/  
satellite receiver’s side.  
Recording using the Quick Timer  
(One-touch Timer Recording)  
You can set the recorder to record in 30-minute  
increments.  
6 Press REC MODE repeatedly to select the  
1 Press DVD to operate the DVD recorder.  
recording mode.  
2 Press z REC repeatedly to set the  
The display changes on the TV screen as  
follows:  
duration.  
Each press increases the time by 30 minutes,  
up to eight hours*.  
HQ  
HSP  
EP  
SP  
LP  
LSP  
ESP  
(Normal  
recording)  
0:30  
1:00  
7:30 8:00  
SLP  
For details about the recording mode, see  
c” and “OTR” light up, and the remaining  
recording time appears in the front panel  
display.  
7 Press z REC.  
When the time counter reaches “0:00,” the  
recorder stops recording and turns off.  
* 14 hours 30 minutes for DVD+R DL (Double Layer)  
discs.  
Recording starts.  
Recording continues until you stop the  
recording or the disc is full.  
Leave the cable box/satellite receiver turned  
on and do not change the channel you are  
recording.  
To cancel the Quick Timer  
Press z REC repeatedly until the counter appears  
in the front panel display. The recorder returns to  
normal recording mode.  
To stop recording  
Press x STOP.  
Note that it may take a few seconds for the  
recorder to stop recording.  
To stop recording  
Press x STOP twice.  
Note that it may take a few seconds for the  
recorder to stop recording.  
To pause recording  
Press X PAUSE.  
To restart recording, press X PAUSE again.  
To watch a VHS tape while recording  
Press VIDEO to operate the VCR, insert a tape,  
then press H PLAY.  
z Hints  
• To play a disc recorded with this recorder on other  
equipment, finalize the disc (page 88).  
• You can turn off the TV during recording.  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Checking the disc status while  
recording  
You can check the recording information such as  
recording time or disc type.  
DVD Timer Recording From  
Connected Equipment  
+
-
-
+
-
-
RVideo  
RWVR RWVideo  
RVR  
RW  
R
You can set the timer for a total of 12 programs  
together with DVD and VCR timer recording, up  
to one month in advance.  
Note that the maximum continuous recording time  
for a single title is 12 hours. Contents beyond this  
time will not be recorded.  
Press DISPLAY during recording.  
The information display appears.  
Press the button repeatedly to change the display  
If you record from connected equipment that has a  
timer function, you can use the Synchro Rec  
function (page 51).  
Record  
0:00:03  
HQ  
Rem 00:59  
Line1  
Note  
Do not operate your cable box or satellite receiver just  
before or during a timer recording. This may prevent the  
accurate recording of a program.  
A Disc type  
Z OPEN/  
CLOSE  
DVD  
B Recording status  
C Recording time  
D Recording mode  
E Remaining disc space  
F Input source  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
SYSTEM  
MENU  
TIMER  
M/m/</,,  
ENTER  
z Hint  
You can view the information also in the front panel  
display. Press TIME/TEXT repeatedly to change the  
display. Note that TIME/TEXT does not work during  
One-touch Timer Recording.  
x STOP  
Creating chapters in a title  
The recorder will automatically divide a recording  
(a title) into chapters by inserting chapter marks at  
5 or 15-minute intervals during recording. Select  
the interval, “5 Min” (default) or “15 Min” in  
“DVD Auto Chapter” of “Features” in the “Setup”  
1 Press DVD to operate the DVD recorder.  
2 Press Z OPEN/CLOSE, and place a  
recordable disc on the disc tray.  
If you do not want to divide titles, select “Off.”  
Recording side facing down  
,continued  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
If you make a mistake, select the item and  
change the setting.  
3 Press Z OPEN/CLOSE to close the disc  
tray.  
Wait until “LOAD” disappears from the front  
panel display.  
Unused discs are automatically formatted. For  
the DVD-RW/DVD-R’s recording format  
(VR mode or Video mode), see “Formatting a  
6 Press ENTER.  
The Timer List menu (page 53) appears.  
The c indicator lights up in the front panel  
display, and the recorder is ready to start  
recording.  
• If the c indicator flashes in the front panel  
display, check that a recordable disc is  
inserted and that there is enough disc space  
for the recording.  
4 Press TIMER.  
Timer – Standard  
10:10 AM  
• If timer settings overlap, a message appears.  
To change or cancel a timer recording, select  
“Edit” from the Timer List (page 53).  
No Rec To  
Date  
Start  
End  
Source Mode Edit  
No.01  
01
02Media Date  
StartEnd  
Ch  
Mode  
03
DVD  
Today  
09 00  
:
10 : 00  
Line1  
SP  
PM  
PM  
04
05
06
7 Press SYSTEM MENU to turn off the menu.  
There is no need to turn off the recorder before  
the timer recording starts.  
Leave the cable box/satellite receiver turned  
on and do not change the channel selected on  
the cable box/satellite receiver until the  
recorder finishes the timer recording.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
5 Select an item using </, and adjust  
using M/m.  
A “Media”: Select “DVD.”  
To stop recording  
Press x STOP twice.  
Note that it may take a few seconds for the  
recorder to stop recording.  
B “Date”: Sets the date using M.  
To record the same program every day or  
the same day every week, press m.  
The item changes as follows:  
If timer settings overlap  
Today y Sun-Sat (Sunday to Saturday)  
y Mon-Sat (Monday to Saturday) y  
Mon-Fri (Monday to Friday) y Sun  
(every Sunday) y Mon (every Monday)  
y y Sat (every Saturday) y  
1 month later y y Today  
The program that starts first has priority and the  
second program starts recording only after the first  
program has finished. If the programs start at the  
same time, the program listed first in the menu has  
priority. If the end time of one setting and the start  
time of another timer setting is the same, the  
beginning of the program that starts later will be  
cut.  
C “Start”: Sets the start time.  
D “End”: Sets the stop time.  
7:00  
8:00  
9:00  
10:00  
E “Ch”: Selects the channel or input  
source.  
Program 1  
Program 2  
• When using the cable box/satellite  
receiver control, select the channel.  
• When not using the cable box/satellite  
receiver control, select the input, LINE1  
or LINE2. Select the channel on the  
connected cable box/satellite receiver’s  
side before the timer recording starts.  
will be cut off  
7:00  
8:00  
9:00  
10:00  
Program 1  
Program 2  
F “Mode”: Selects the recording mode  
To use the Rec Mode Adjust function  
(page 51), select “AUTO.”  
will be cut off  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
To change or cancel timer recording  
Recording From Connected  
Equipment With a Timer  
(Synchro Rec)  
To use the Rec Mode Adjust function  
If the remaining disc space is not enough for the  
current recording, the recorder automatically  
adjusts the recording mode. Select “AUTO” for  
“Mode” when setting the timer.  
+
RW  
-
-
+
R
-
-
RVideo  
RWVR RWVideo  
RVR  
You can set the recorder to automatically record  
programs from connected equipment that has a  
timer function (such as a satellite tuner). Connect  
the equipment to the LINE 1 IN jacks on the rear  
of the recorder (page 13).  
When the connected equipment turns on, the  
recorder starts recording a program from the LINE  
1 IN jacks.  
z Hints  
• You can play the recorded program by selecting the  
program title in the Title List menu.  
• When the start time and the channel or input source to  
be recorded are the same but the “Media” setting  
differs, the program is recorded to both the DVD disc  
and the VHS tape.  
• You can also turn on the timer programming menu  
from the System Menu. Press SYSTEM MENU to  
select “Timer,” and select “Timer-Standard.”  
DVD  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
Notes  
• Even when correctly set, the program may not be  
recorded if another recording is underway, or other  
prioritized timer setting overlaps.  
• Before the timer recording starts, “TIMER REC”  
flashes in the front panel display.  
SYSTEM  
MENU  
M/m/</,,  
ENTER  
• The recorder automatically turns off when a timer  
recording finishes, even if the recording started with  
the recorder turned on.  
• The recorder does not record programs with Copy-  
Never signals. Such recordings stop after a few  
seconds.  
x STOP  
REC MODE  
SYNCHRO  
REC  
1 Press DVD to operate the DVD recorder.  
2 Insert a recordable disc.  
3 Select the line input audio.  
Set “Line Audio Input” of “Audio” setup to  
“Stereo” or “Main/Sub” in the “Setup”  
,continued  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
4 Press REC MODE repeatedly to select the  
recording mode.  
If the timer settings of a Synchro-Recording  
and another timer recording overlap  
The display changes on the TV screen as  
follows:  
Regardless of whether or not the program is a  
Synchro-Rec program, the program that starts first  
has priority. The recorder starts recording the  
second program about ten seconds after the first  
program has finished. If the end time of one  
setting and the start time of another timer setting is  
the same, the beginning of the program that starts  
later will be cut.  
HQ  
HSP  
SP  
LSP  
SLP  
EP  
LP  
ESP  
For details about the recording mode, see  
5 Press SYSTEM MENU while the recorder is  
in stop mode.  
7:00  
8:00  
9:00  
10:00  
Program 1  
Program 2  
6 Select “Setup,” and press ENTER.  
7 Select “Features,” and press ENTER.  
The “Features” setup appears.  
will be cut off  
8 Select “Synchro Recording,” and press  
ENTER.  
Notes  
• The recorder starts recording only after detecting the  
video signal from the connected equipment. The  
beginning of the program may not be recorded  
regardless of whether or not the recorder’s power is on  
or off.  
• To use the connected equipment during Synchro-Rec  
standby, cancel the standby mode by pressing  
SYNCHRO REC. To return to standby mode again, be  
sure to turn off the equipment and press SYNCHRO  
REC, before Synchro-Rec starts.  
• The Synchro-Rec function does not work with some  
tuners. For details, see the tuner’s operating  
instructions.  
• After a recording has finished, the recorder enters the  
Synchro-Rec standby mode until the SYNCHRO REC  
indicator turns off.  
9 Select “to DVD,” and press ENTER.  
10 Press SYSTEM MENU to turn off the menu.  
11 Set the timer on the connected equipment  
to the time you want to record, and turn it  
off.  
12 Press SYNCHRO REC.  
The SYNCHRO REC indicator lights up on  
the front panel and the recorder stands by for  
Synchro-Rec.  
The recorder starts recording when a signal is  
received from the connected equipment.  
When the connected equipment turns off, the  
recording stops and the recorder turns off.  
• If Synchro-Rec starts with the recorder turned on, the  
recorder will turn off when the recording ends.  
• The recorder does not record programs with Copy-  
Never signals. Such recordings stop after a few  
seconds.  
To stop recording  
Press x STOP twice.  
To cancel a Synchro-Rec function  
Press SYNCHRO REC before recording starts.  
The SYNCHRO REC indicator on the recorder  
turns off.  
If you press SYNCHRO REC during Synchro-  
Rec, the recording stops, the SYNCHRO REC  
indicator turns off, and the recorder turns off.  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
4 Select the timer setting you want to change  
or cancel, and press ENTER.  
Changing or Canceling DVD  
Timer Settings (Timer List)  
The sub-menu appears.  
Timer List  
10:10 AM  
+
-
-
+
R
-
-
RVideo  
RWVR RWVideo  
RVR  
RW  
No. Media  
Date  
04/15  
04/30  
Start  
End  
Ch  
Mode Edit  
Edit  
01 DVD  
02 DVD  
09:00PM  
09:15PM  
10:00PM  
09:45PM  
Line1  
Line1  
E
rase  
You can change or cancel timer settings using the  
Timer List menu.  
03 ---  
04 ---  
05 ---  
06 ---  
--/--  
--/--  
--/--  
--/--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
----  
----  
----  
----  
---  
---  
---  
---  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
5 Select one of the options, and press  
ENTER.  
SYSTEM  
MENU  
“Edit”: Changes the timer setting.  
Select an item using </, and adjust using  
M/m. Press ENTER.  
M/m/</,,  
ENTER  
Timer – Standard  
10:10 AM  
O RETURN  
No Rec To  
Date  
Start  
End  
Source Mode Edit  
No.01  
01
02Media Date  
StartEnd  
Ch  
Mode  
03
DVD  
04/15  
09 00  
:
10 : 00  
Line1  
SP  
PM  
PM  
04
05
06
1 Press SYSTEM MENU.  
The System Menu appears.  
“Erase”: Erases the timer setting.  
Select “OK” and press ENTER when asked  
for confirmation.  
2 Select “Timer,” and press ENTER.  
3 Select “Timer List,” and press ENTER.  
Timer List  
10:10 AM  
Timer List  
10:10 AM  
No Media  
Date  
Start  
End  
Source Mode Edit  
01
02
No. Media  
Date  
04/15  
04/30  
Start  
End  
Ch  
Mode Edit  
01 DVD  
02 DVD  
09:00PM  
09:15PM  
10:00PM  
09:45PM  
Line1  
Line1  
SP  
SP  
Do you want to erase ‘‘No.01’’?  
03
04
05
06
03 ---  
04 ---  
05 ---  
06 ---  
--/--  
--/--  
--/--  
--/--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
----  
----  
----  
----  
---  
---  
---  
---  
OK  
Cancel  
6 Press SYSTEM MENU to turn off the Timer  
List.  
Timer information displays the recording  
date, time, recording mode, etc.  
If there are more than six timer settings, press  
m to display the next page.  
To return to the previous display  
Press O RETURN.  
Notes  
• Even when correctly set, the program may not be  
recorded if another recording is underway, or other  
prioritized timer setting overlaps. For priority, see  
,continued  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
• You cannot change the timer settings for a recording  
currently underway.  
• The Timer List displays both the DVD recorder and  
VCR timer settings.  
Recording From Another  
VCR or Similar Device  
+
RW  
-
-
+
R
-
-
RVideo  
RWVR RWVideo  
RVR  
You can record from a connected VCR or similar  
device. For connection details, see “Connecting  
Use the DV IN jack on the front panel if the  
equipment has a DV/D8 output jack (i.LINK  
jack). To record from a digital video camera  
connected to the DV IN jack, see page 90.  
DVD  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
INPUT  
x STOP  
z REC  
REC MODE  
1 Press DVD to operate the DVD recorder.  
2 Insert a recordable disc.  
3 Press INPUT repeatedly to select an input  
source according to the connection you  
made.  
The front panel display changes as follows:  
LINE1  
LINE2  
DV  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
4 Press REC MODE repeatedly to select the  
recording mode.  
The display changes on the TV screen as  
follows:  
HQ  
HSP  
SP  
LSP  
SLP  
EP  
LP  
ESP  
For details about the recording mode, see  
5 Select the line input audio.  
Set “Line Audio Input” of “Audio” setup to  
“Stereo” or “Main/Sub” in the “Setup”  
display (page 100).  
6 Insert the source tape into the connected  
equipment and set to playback pause.  
7 Press z REC on this recorder and the  
pause or play button on the connected  
equipment at the same time.  
Recording starts.  
To stop recording, press x STOP on this  
recorder.  
Notes  
• A video game image may not be recorded clearly.  
• The recorder does not record programs with Copy-  
Never signals. Such recordings stop after a few  
seconds.  
• During recording or recording pause, you cannot  
change the recording mode.  
• You cannot change the input source during recording.  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Edit options for DVD-RWs (VR mode)/  
DVD-Rs (VR mode)  
DVD Editing  
-
-
RVR  
RWVR  
Before Editing  
You can enjoy advanced edit functions. First you  
have two options for a DVD-RW (VR mode) and  
DVD-R (VR mode): editing either the original  
recording (called the “original”), or the playback  
information created from the original (called a  
“Playlist”). Since each is different in nature and  
offers different merits, read the following and  
select the one that better suits your needs.  
This recorder offers various edit options for  
various disc types. Before you edit, check the disc  
type in the front panel display, and select the  
option available for your disc (page 30).  
Notes  
• You may lose the edited contents if you remove the disc  
or a timer recording starts while editing.  
• You cannot edit recordings on DVD-RWs (Video  
mode), DVD+Rs, or DVD-Rs (Video mode) recorded  
on other DVD equipment.  
To edit original titles  
Edits made to the original titles are final. If you  
plan to retain an unaltered original recording,  
create and edit a Playlist (see below). The edit  
functions available for original titles are:  
– Renaming a title (page 60).  
Edit options for DVD+RWs/DVD-RWs  
(Video mode)/DVD+Rs/DVD-Rs  
(Video mode)  
– Erasing a title (page 57).  
– Erasing a chapter (page 58).  
– Setting protection against erasure (page 57).  
– Erasing a section of a title (A-B Erase) (page 58).  
– Dividing a title (page 59).  
+
+
R
-
RW  
RWVideo  
-
RVideo  
You can perform simple edits. Since Video mode  
titles are actual recordings on the disc, you cannot  
undo any edits you make. The edit functions  
available for Video mode titles are:  
– Renaming a title (page 60).  
– Erasing a title (page 57).  
– Setting protection against erasure (DVD+RWs  
only) (page 57).  
To create and edit Playlist titles  
A Playlist is a group of Playlist titles created from  
the original title for editing purposes. When you  
create a Playlist, only the control information  
necessary for playback, such as the playback  
order, is stored on the disc. Since the original titles  
are left unaltered, Playlist titles can be re-edited.  
If you erase an original title used in a Playlist, that  
Playlist is also erased.  
– Erasing a section of a title (A-B Erase)  
(DVD+RWs only) (page 58).  
– Dividing a title (DVD+RWs only) (page 59).  
Example: You have recorded the final few  
matches of a soccer tournament on a DVD-RW  
(VR mode). You want to create a digest with the  
goal scenes and other highlights, but you also want  
to keep the original recording.  
Notes  
• Once the disc is finalized, you cannot edit or record on  
the disc (except for DVD+RWs).  
• If a message appears and indicates that the disc’s  
control information is full, erase unnecessary titles.  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
In this case, you can compile highlight scenes as a  
Playlist title. You can even rearrange the scene  
order within the Playlist title. See “Editing a  
The advanced edit functions available for Playlist  
titles are:  
– Renaming a title (page 60).  
– Erasing a title (page 57).  
– Erasing a chapter (page 58).  
Editing a Title  
+
RW  
-
-
+
R
-
-
RVideo  
RWVR RWVideo  
RVR  
This section explains the basic edit functions. Note  
that editing is irreversible. To edit a DVD-RW  
(VR mode) or DVD-R (VR mode) without  
changing the original recordings, create a Playlist  
title (page 61).  
– Erasing a section of a title (A-B Erase) (page 58).  
– Editing a Playlist scene (page 63).  
– Dividing a title (page 59).  
– Combining titles (page 64).  
DVD  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
z Hint  
You can switch the Title List to show original or Playlist.  
While the Title List menu is turned on, press ORIGINAL/  
PLAYLIST repeatedly.  
ORIGINAL/  
PLAYLIST  
TITLE LIST  
M/m/</,,  
Notes  
ENTER  
• You cannot protect Playlist titles.  
O RETURN  
• If a message appears and indicates that the disc’s  
control information is full, erase unnecessary titles.  
• You cannot create or edit Playlist titles on a finalized  
disc.  
./>  
H PLAY  
x STOP  
X PAUSE  
1 Press DVD to operate the DVD recorder.  
2 Press TITLE LIST.  
When editing a DVD-RW (VR mode) or  
DVD-R (VR mode), press ORIGINAL/  
PLAYLIST to switch to the “Title List  
(Original),” if necessary.  
Title List (Original)  
10:10 AM  
1/4  
No. Title  
Length Edit  
01 LINE 1  
02 LINE 1  
03 LINE 1  
01:29:03  
00:31:23  
01:59:00  
00:58:56  
>
>
>
>
04 LINE 1  
T
LINE  
1
May/02/2007  
08:00 PM  
3 Select a title, and press ENTER.  
The sub-menu appears.  
,continued  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
4 Select an option, and press ENTER.  
You can select from the following:  
1 Press TITLE LIST.  
Press ORIGINAL/PLAYLIST to switch to the  
“Title List (Original),” if necessary.  
“Title Erase”: Erases the selected title. Select  
“OK” when asked for confirmation.  
2 Select a title, and press ENTER.  
*1  
“Chapter Erase” : Allows you to select a  
The sub-menu appears.  
chapter in the title and erase it (see below).  
*2  
“Protect” : Protects the title. Select “On”  
3 Select “Chapter Erase,” and press ENTER.  
when the Protection display appears. “  
appears for the protected title. To cancel the  
protection, select “Off.” “ ” changes to  
The display for erasing chapters appears.  
Chapter Erase (Original)  
Chapter 1 / 3  
10:10 AM  
.”  
Title No.01  
“Title Name”: Allows you to rename the title  
“A-B Erase” : Erases a section of the title  
Check  
Erase  
Modify  
Move  
Add  
*2  
01  
00:00:34  
02  
00:00:10  
03  
00:04:20  
(see below).  
“Divide Title” : Divides a title into two  
*2  
Copy  
*1  
DVD-RWs (VR mode) and DVD-Rs (VR mode)  
only  
4 Select the chapter you want to erase, and  
press ENTER.  
*2  
DVD+RWs, DVD-RWs (VR mode), and DVD-R  
(VR mode) only  
“Check” is selected. To preview the chapter,  
press ENTER. When playback finishes or  
when you press O RETURN, the display  
returns to “Chapter Erase (Original).”  
About freeing up disc space  
Erasing titles, chapters, or scenes:  
– frees up disc space on a DVD-RW (VR mode).  
– frees up disc space on a DVD+RW/DVD-RW  
(Video mode) only when you erase the last title  
or chapter.  
5 Select “Erase,” and press ENTER.  
The display asks for confirmation.  
6 Select “OK,” and press ENTER.  
The selected chapter is erased from the title.  
To erase other chapters, repeat from step 4.  
– cannot free up disc space on a DVD+R/DVD+R  
DL/DVD-R.  
z Hint  
z Hint  
You can also rename a disc (page 67).  
You can also erase chapters from a Playlist title  
Notes  
• When editing a DVD-RW (Video mode), DVD+R, or  
DVD-R, finish all editing before finalizing the disc.  
You cannot edit a finalized disc.  
• You cannot erase protected titles or erase chapters from  
a protected title.  
Note  
If you erase an original title used in a Playlist, that Playlist  
is also erased.  
• If you erase an original title used in a Playlist, that  
Playlist is also erased.  
Erasing a section of a title  
(A-B Erase)  
Erasing a chapter (Chapter Erase)  
+
RW  
-
-
RVR  
RWVR  
-
-
RVR  
RWVR  
You can select a section (scene) within a title and  
erase it. Note that erasing scenes from original  
titles cannot be undone.  
You can select a chapter within a title and erase it.  
Note that erasing chapters from original titles  
cannot be undone.  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
z Hints  
1 Press TITLE LIST.  
• A chapter mark is inserted after the scene was erased.  
The chapter mark divides the title into separate chapters  
on either side of the mark.  
When editing a DVD-RW (VR mode) or  
DVD-R (VR mode), press ORIGINAL/  
PLAYLIST to switch to the “Title List  
(Original),” if necessary.  
• You can also erase a section of a Playlist title (page 63).  
2 Select a title, and press ENTER.  
Notes  
The sub-menu appears.  
• Images or sound may be momentarily interrupted at the  
point where you erase a section of a title.  
• Sections shorter than five seconds may not be erased.  
• The start and end points of a title may be different from  
what you have set.  
3 Select “A-B Erase,” and press ENTER.  
The display for setting point A and B appears.  
“Start” is selected.  
• The total playing time of the title does not change even  
if a scene was erased.  
• If you erase an original title used in a Playlist, that  
Playlist is also erased.  
A-B Erase  
10:10 AM  
Title No.01  
Start  
End  
Start 00:00:00  
Dividing a title into two (Divide Title)  
Erase  
Finish  
00:00:07  
+
RW  
-
-
RVR  
RWVR  
T
Title No.01  
May/02/2007 08:00 PM  
End 00:00:00  
You can divide a title into two. Note that dividing  
original titles cannot be undone.  
4 Press ENTER at the start point of the  
section to be erased (point A).  
You can use H PLAY,  
1 Press TITLE LIST.  
,
When editing a DVD-RW (VR mode) or  
DVD-R (VR mode), press ORIGINAL/  
PLAYLIST to switch to the “Title List  
(Original),” if necessary.  
./>, x STOP, and X PAUSE to find  
the point. “End” is selected.  
A-B Erase  
10:10 AM  
Title No.01  
2 Select a title, and press ENTER.  
Start  
End  
The sub-menu appears.  
Start 00:00:10  
3 Select “Divide Title,” and press ENTER.  
The display for setting the dividing point  
appears.  
Erase  
Finish  
00:00:10  
T
Title No.01  
May/02/2007 08:00 PM  
End 00:00:00  
“Point” is selected.  
5 Press ENTER at the end point of the section  
(point B).  
Divide Title (Original)  
10:10 AM  
Title No.01  
“Erase” is selected.  
Point  
To reset the start or end point, select “Start” or  
“End” and repeat from step 4 or 5.  
Divide  
Start 00:00:00  
00:00:07  
6 Press ENTER.  
T
Title No. 01  
May/02/2007 08:00 PM  
The display asks for confirmation.  
End 00:00:00  
7 Select “OK,” and press ENTER.  
The scene is erased.  
To continue, repeat from step 4.  
To finish, select “Finish,” and press ENTER.  
,continued  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4 Press ENTER at the point where you want to  
divide the title.  
Changing the Name of a  
Title  
You can use H PLAY,  
,
./>, x STOP, and X PAUSE to find  
the point.  
“Divide” is selected.  
+
RW  
-
-
+
R
-
-
RVideo  
RWVR RWVideo  
RVR  
You can enter a title name of up to 32 characters.  
Since the displayed number of characters is  
limited, their appearance in menus such as Title  
List may be different. When the display for  
entering characters appears, follow the steps  
below.  
Divide Title (Original)  
10:10 AM  
Title No.01  
Point  
Divide  
Start 00:00:00  
00:00:10  
T
Title No. 01  
May/02/2007 08:00 PM  
End 00:00:10  
DVD  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
5 Press ENTER.  
The display asks for confirmation.  
To reset the dividing point, select “No” and  
press ENTER, then repeat from step 4.  
ORIGINAL/  
PLAYLIST  
M/m/</,,  
ENTER  
TITLE LIST  
6 Select “Yes,” and press ENTER.  
The display asks whether to rename the title.  
To use the same name as before, select “No”  
and press ENTER to finish.  
O RETURN  
7 Select “Yes,” and press ENTER.  
The “Title Name” display appears.  
8 Follow steps 5 to 7 of “Changing the Name  
renaming.  
1 Press DVD to operate the DVD recorder.  
The divided title appears in the Title List with  
the new name.  
2 Press TITLE LIST.  
When editing a DVD-RW (VR mode) or  
DVD-R (VR mode), press ORIGINAL/  
PLAYLIST to switch to the “Title List  
(Original),” if necessary.  
zHints  
• You can also divide a Playlist title (page 63).  
• If the dividing point is set too close to the  
beginning of the title, the title cannot be divided.  
3 Select a title, and press ENTER.  
The sub-menu appears.  
4 Select “Title Name,” and press ENTER.  
The “Title Name” display appears.  
Cursor  
Input row  
Title Name  
10:10 AM  
K
_
A
F
K
P
U
Z
B
G
L
C
H
D
I
E
J
a
f
b
g
l
c
h
d
i
e
j
1
6
2
7
_
3
8
4
9
=
#
(
5
0
.
M
R
N
S
X
O
T
Y
k
p
u
z
m
r
n
s
x
o
t
-
+
Q
V
q
v
@
&
$
)
~
%
!
^
W
w
y
Backspace  
Space  
Delete  
Clear  
Finish  
Setting buttons  
Character palette  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
5 Select the character you want to enter  
using M/m/</,, and press ENTER.  
The selected character appears in the input  
row.  
Creating a Playlist  
-
-
RVR  
RWVR  
You can only enter characters and symbols  
that are displayed.  
Playlist titles allow you to edit without changing  
the original recordings (see “Edit options for  
page 56). You can create a Playlist title by  
combining up to 99 sections (scenes) from original  
titles.  
• To change the cursor position, select the  
input row using M, and press </,.  
• To erase a character, select either of the  
following setting buttons and press ENTER.  
“Backspace”: Erases the character to the left  
of the cursor.  
Notes  
• If you erase an original title used in a Playlist, that  
Playlist is also erased.  
• You cannot create or edit Playlist titles on a finalized  
disc.  
“Delete”: Erases the character at the cursor  
position.  
“Clear”: Erases all the characters in the input  
row.  
• To insert a space, move the cursor to the  
desired position, select “Space,” and press  
ENTER.  
• To insert a character, move the cursor to the  
desired position, select the character, and  
press ENTER.  
DVD  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
SYSTEM  
MENU  
TITLE LIST  
ORIGINAL/  
PLAYLIST  
6 Repeat step 5 to enter the remaining  
characters.  
M/m/</,,  
ENTER  
To return to the Title List without renaming  
the title, press O RETURN.  
./>  
H PLAY  
7 Select “Finish,” and press ENTER.  
x STOP  
X PAUSE  
z Hint  
You can also rename a disc (page 67). Follow steps 5 to  
7 above when the “Disc Name” display appears.  
1 Press DVD to operate the DVD recorder.  
2 Press SYSTEM MENU while the recorder is  
in stop mode.  
Title List (Original)  
Title List  
10:10 AM  
Press ENTER :  
Timer  
Edit  
Title Menu for DVD Title List.  
Dubbing  
Disc Setting  
Setup  
,continued  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3 Select “Edit,” and press ENTER.  
Playing a Playlist title  
Edit  
10:10 AM  
1 Press TITLE LIST.  
Title List  
Create Playlist  
Edit Playlist  
Timer  
2 Press ORIGINAL/PLAYLIST to switch to the  
Edit  
“Playlist” Title List.  
Dubbing  
Disc Setting  
Setup  
3 Select a Playlist title, and press ENTER.  
The sub-menu appears.  
4 Select “Play,” and press ENTER.  
4 Select “Create Playlist,” and press ENTER.  
The display for creating a Playlist appears.  
“Start” is selected.  
z Hint  
When a Playlist title is created, the start and end points  
will become chapter marks, and each scene will become  
a chapter.  
Create Playlist  
10:10 AM  
Scene No.01  
Notes  
Start  
End  
• The picture may pause when an edited scene is played.  
• The start and end points in a title may be different from  
what you have set.  
Start 00:00:00  
Make  
Finish  
00:00:07  
T
Playlist No. 01  
---/--/---- --:--  
End 00:00:00  
5 Press ENTER at the start point.  
You can use H PLAY,  
,
./>, x STOP, and X PAUSE to find  
the point.  
“End” is selected.  
Create Playlist  
10:10 AM  
Scene No.01  
Start  
End  
Start 00:00:10  
Make  
Finish  
00:00:10  
T
Playlist No. 01  
---/--/---- --:--  
End 00:00:00  
6 Press ENTER at the end point.  
“Make” is selected.  
To reset the start or end point, select “Start” or  
“End” and repeat step 5 or 6.  
7 Press ENTER.  
The selected section is captured as a scene. To  
continue, repeat from step 5.  
8 When you finish capturing scenes, select  
“Finish” and press ENTER.  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4 Select “Edit Playlist,” and press ENTER.  
The “Playlist” Title List appears.  
Editing a Playlist  
Playlist  
10:10 AM  
-
-
RVR  
RWVR  
1/2  
No. Title  
Length Edit  
01 LINE 1  
02 LINE 1  
00:05:04  
00:00:51  
>
>
You can edit Playlist titles or scenes within them,  
without changing the actual recordings.  
T
LINE  
1
DVD  
May/02/2007  
03:25 PM  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
5 Select a Playlist title, and press ENTER.  
SYSTEM  
MENU  
The sub-menu appears.  
M/m/</,,  
ENTER  
6 Select an option, and press ENTER.  
Select from the following options. For details,  
see the pages in parentheses.  
O RETURN  
./>  
H PLAY  
“Title Erase”: Erases the title. Select “OK”  
when asked for confirmation.  
“Chapter Erase”: Allows you to select  
chapters in the Playlist title to erase (page 58).  
“Title Name”: Allows you to rename the title  
x STOP  
X PAUSE  
“A-B Erase”: Allows you to select sections in  
the title to erase (page 58).  
“Edit Scene”: Allows you to re-edit scenes in  
the Playlist title. Go to step 7.  
“Divide Title”: Divides the title in two at a  
desired point (page 59).  
“Combine Titles”: Allows you to combine  
two titles into one (page 64).  
1 Press DVD to operate the DVD recorder.  
2 Press SYSTEM MENU while the recorder is  
in stop mode.  
Title List (Original)  
Title List  
10:10 AM  
7 Select “Edit Scene,” and press ENTER.  
The display for editing scenes appears.  
Press ENTER :  
Timer  
Edit  
Title Menu for DVD Title List.  
Edit Scene  
Scene No.1 / 3  
10:10 AM  
Dubbing  
Disc Setting  
Setup  
Playlist No.01  
Check  
Erase  
Modify  
Move  
Add  
01  
00:00:34  
02  
00:00:10  
03  
00:04:20  
3 Select “Edit,” and press ENTER.  
Copy  
Edit  
10:10 AM  
Title List  
Create Playlist  
Edit Playlist  
Timer  
“Check”: Allows you to preview a scene.  
Starts playback of the selected scene when  
you press ENTER. The display returns to the  
“Edit Scene” display when the playback  
finishes or when you press O RETURN.  
“Erase”: Erases a scene (page 64).  
Edit  
Dubbing  
Disc Setting  
Setup  
“Modify”: Allows you to change the start and  
end point of a scene (page 64).  
,continued  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
“Move”: Allows you to change scene order  
3 Select a Playlist title to be combined.  
“Add”: Allows you to add other scenes before  
a selected scene (page 65).  
“Copy”: Allows you to copy a scene  
Playlist  
10:10 AM  
3/4  
No. Title  
Length Edit  
01 LINE 1  
02 LINE 1  
03 LINE 1  
00:05:04  
00:00:51  
01:59:00  
00:58:56  
>
>
>
>
04 LINE 1  
T
LINE  
1
To return to the previous display  
Press O RETURN.  
May/15/2007  
11:30 PM  
To turn off the display  
Press SYSTEM MENU.  
4 Press ENTER.  
The display asks for confirmation.  
z Hint  
5 Select “Yes,” and press ENTER.  
The display asks whether to rename the title.  
To use the same name as before, select “No”  
and press ENTER to finish.  
The Resume Play function will work for scene playback.  
Note  
You cannot create or edit Playlist titles on a finalized  
disc.  
6 Select “Yes,” and press ENTER.  
The “Title Name” display appears.  
Combining two titles into one  
(Combine Titles)  
7 Follow steps 5 to 7 of “Changing the Name  
renaming.  
-
-
RVR  
RWVR  
The two Playlist titles become one Playlist  
title with the new name.  
You can select a Playlist title and combine it with  
another Playlist title.  
Erasing a scene (Erase)  
1 Follow steps 1 to 5 of “Editing a Playlist”  
(page 63) to select a Playlist title.  
The sub-menu appears.  
-
RWVR  
-
RVR  
You can erase a selected scene.  
2 Select “Combine Titles,” and press  
ENTER.  
1 Follow steps 1 to 7 of “Editing a Playlist”  
The next title below is also selected.  
The “Edit Scene” display appears.  
Playlist  
10:10 AM  
2 Select the scene you want to erase, and  
press ENTER.  
1/4  
No. Title  
Length Edit  
01 LINE 1  
02 LINE 1  
03 LINE 1  
00:05:04  
00:00:51  
01:59:00  
00:58:56  
>
>
>
>
3 Select “Erase,” and press ENTER.  
04 LINE 1  
The display asks for confirmation.  
T
LINE  
1
4 Select “OK,” and press ENTER.  
May/02/2007  
03:25 PM  
The selected scene is erased.  
To erase other scenes, repeat from step 2.  
Modifying a scene (Modify)  
-
-
RVR  
RWVR  
You can change the start and end point of the  
selected scene.  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
1 Follow steps 1 to 7 of “Editing a Playlist”  
Moving a scene (Move)  
The “Edit Scene” display appears.  
-
-
RVR  
RWVR  
2 Select the scene you want to modify, and  
press ENTER.  
You can change the scene order within the Playlist  
title.  
3 Select “Modify,” and press ENTER.  
1 Follow steps 1 to 7 of “Editing a Playlist”  
“Start” is selected.  
Modify  
10:10 AM  
The “Edit Scene” display appears.  
Scene No.01  
2 Select the scene you want to move, and  
press ENTER.  
Start  
End  
3 Select “Move,” and press ENTER.  
Start 00:00:00  
End 00:00:00  
Change  
Cancel  
Edit Scene  
10:10 AM  
00:00:07  
T
Playlist No. 01  
Scene No. 2 / 3  
Playlist No.01  
May/02/2007 03:25 PM  
Check  
Erase  
Modify  
Move  
Add  
01  
00:00:34  
02  
00:00:10  
03  
00:04:20  
4 Press ENTER at the start point.  
You can use H PLAY,  
,
Copy  
./>, x STOP, and X PAUSE to find  
the point.  
“End” is selected.  
4 Select a new location using </,, and  
press ENTER.  
Modify  
10:10 AM  
Scene No.01  
The selected scene moves to the new location.  
To move other scenes, repeat from step 2.  
Start  
End  
Edit Scene  
Scene No. 3 / 3  
10:10 AM  
Start 00:00:10  
End 00:00:00  
Playlist No.01  
Change  
Cancel  
00:00:10  
Check  
Erase  
Modify  
Move  
Add  
T
Playlist No. 01  
May/02/2007 03:25 PM  
01  
00:00:34  
02  
00:04:20  
03  
00:00:10  
5 Press ENTER at the end point.  
“Change” is selected.  
Copy  
To reset the start or end point, select “Start” or  
“End” and repeat step 4 or 5.  
Adding a scene (Add)  
6 Press ENTER.  
The display returns to the “Edit Scene”  
display.  
-
-
RVR  
RWVR  
The re-selected section is captured as a scene.  
To modify other scenes, repeat from step 2.  
You can add a scene before the selected scene.  
1 Follow steps 1 to 7 of “Editing a Playlist”  
To cancel modifying  
Select “Cancel,” and press ENTER.  
The “Edit Scene” display appears.  
2 Select the location where you want to add,  
and press ENTER.  
Note  
A new scene will be added before the selected  
scene.  
The start and end point of a scene may be different from  
what you have set.  
,continued  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
3 Select “Add,” and press ENTER.  
Copying a scene (Copy)  
“Start” is selected.  
-
-
RVR  
RWVR  
Add  
10:10 AM  
Scene No.01  
You can copy and add a selected scene.  
Start  
End  
Add  
1 Follow steps 1 to 7 of “Editing a Playlist”  
Start 00:00:00  
End 00:00:00  
00:00:07  
The “Edit Scene” display appears.  
T
Playlist No. 01  
Cancel  
May/02/2007 03:25 PM  
2 Select the scene you want to copy, and  
press ENTER.  
4 Press ENTER at the start point.  
3 Select “Copy,” and press ENTER.  
You can use H PLAY,  
,
./>, x STOP, and X PAUSE to find  
the point.  
Edit Scene  
10:10 AM  
Scene No. 2 / 3  
Playlist No.01  
“End” is selected.  
Check  
Erase  
Modify  
Move  
Add  
Add  
10:10 AM  
01  
00:00:34  
02  
00:00:10  
03  
00:04:20  
Scene No.01  
Start  
End  
Add  
Copy  
Start 00:00:10  
End 00:00:00  
00:00:10  
4 Select a location to copy to using </,  
and press ENTER.  
T
Playlist No. 01  
Cancel  
May/02/2007 03:25 PM  
The scene is copied to the selected location.  
To copy other scenes, repeat from step 2.  
5 Press ENTER at the end point.  
“Add” is selected.  
Edit Scene  
Scene No. 1 / 4  
10:10 AM  
To reset the start or end point, select “Start” or  
“End” and repeat step 4 or 5.  
Playlist No.01  
Check  
Erase  
Modify  
Move  
Add  
6 Press ENTER.  
01  
04  
00:00:10  
00:04:20  
02  
00:00:34  
03  
00:00:10  
The display returns to the “Edit Scene”  
display.  
Copy  
The selected section is added before the scene  
selected in step 2.  
To add other scenes, repeat from step 2.  
To cancel adding  
Select “Cancel,” and press ENTER.  
Note  
The start and end point of a scene may be different from  
what you have set.  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
B “DiscProtect(DVD+RWs/DVD-RWs  
(VR mode)/DVD-Rs (VR mode) only):  
Protects all titles on the disc when  
“Protected” is selected. To cancel the  
protection, select “Not Protected.”  
Formatting/Renaming/  
Protecting a Disc  
+
RW  
-
-
+
R
-
-
RVideo  
RWVR RWVideo  
RVR  
C “Disc Format” (DVD+RWs/DVD-  
RWs/DVD-Rs only): Erases all  
contents of the disc, including protected  
titles, and makes a blank disc (except  
DVD-Rs).  
The “Disc Setting” display allows you to check the  
disc information or change the disc name.  
Depending on the disc type, you can also format or  
set protection.  
For DVD-RWs, select a recording  
format (“VR Mode” or “Video Mode”)  
according to your needs.  
To format unused DVD-Rs in VR  
mode, select “VR Mode” and then  
“OK.”  
DVD  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
SYSTEM  
MENU  
D “Disc Finalize”: Finalizes a disc. See  
M/m/</,,  
ENTER  
page 88 for details.  
E “Disc Information”: Displays the  
following information.  
• Disc name  
O RETURN  
• Disc type (and recording format for a  
DVD-RW (VR mode)/DVD-R (VR  
mode))  
• Total number of titles  
• Protect setting  
• The oldest and most recent recording  
date  
• The total available recording time in  
each recording mode  
1 Press DVD to operate the DVD recorder.  
2 Press SYSTEM MENU while the recorder is  
in stop mode.  
3 Select “Disc Setting,” and press ENTER.  
The “Disc Setting” display appears.  
Disc Information  
10:10 AM  
Disc Name  
Disc 1  
Disc Setting  
10:10 AM  
Media  
DVD-RW  
Format  
VR Mode  
1
2
Title List  
Timer  
Disc Name  
:
:
:
:
Title No.  
Protected  
Date  
Original 6 / Playlist 1  
Not Protected  
Disc Protect  
Not Protected  
VR Mode  
Disc Format  
3
4
Edit  
4/05/2007 ~ 4/30/2007  
Disc Finalize  
Disc Information  
Erase All Titles  
Unfinalized  
Remainder  
HQ : 0H 57M HSP : 1H 26M SP : 1H 55M  
LSP : 2H 23M ESP : 2H 52M LP : 3H 50M  
EP : 5H 46M SLP : 7H 40M 4.4/4.7GB  
Dubbing  
Disc Setting  
Setup  
5
6
F “Erase All Titles” (DVD+RWs/DVD-  
RWs/DVD-Rs (VR mode) only):  
Erases all titles on the disc (except  
protected titles). Select “OK” when  
asked for confirmation.  
4 Select an option, and press ENTER.  
A “Disc Name”: Allows you to rename a  
disc.  
For details on how to enter characters,  
For DVD-RWs (VR mode)/DVD-Rs  
(VR mode), Playlist titles created with  
protected titles are also erased.  
,continued  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
To return to the previous display  
Press O RETURN.  
z Hints  
• You can set protection for individual titles (page 57).  
• By reformatting, you can change the recording format  
on DVD-RWs, or record again on DVD-RWs (Video  
mode) that have been finalized.  
Notes  
• You can label a disc using up to 32 characters;  
however, the name may not display on other DVD  
equipment.  
• You cannot label an unused DVD-R (Video mode)  
disc. Label the disc after you first record on it.  
• You cannot mix VR mode and Video mode on the same  
DVD-RW or DVD-R.  
• You cannot change the recording format on used DVD-  
Rs.  
• The recorder records on new DVD-Rs in Video mode  
unless you first format the discs in VR mode (page 47).  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To stop playback  
Press x STOP.  
VCR Playback  
To eject the tape  
Press Z OPEN/CLOSE.  
Playing a VHS Tape  
To turn off the power while rewinding (Rewind  
Shut Off)  
Press "/1 while the tape is rewinding. The power  
will turn off but the tape will keep rewinding until  
it reaches the end.  
Z OPEN/  
CLOSE  
"/1  
VIDEO  
TRACKING +/–  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
To use the time counter  
Press CLEAR at the point where you want to find  
later. The counter in the front panel display resets  
to “0:00:00.”  
DISPLAY  
CLEAR  
To search for the 0:00:00 point automatically, see  
To display the counter on the TV screen, press  
DISPLAY.  
H PLAY  
x STOP  
Notes  
• During playback, the VCR automatically detects the  
recording system (S-VHS/VHS) and the recording  
mode (SP or EP) from the tape. LP mode recordings  
made on other equipment will play, but picture quality  
is not guaranteed.  
• The counter resets to “0:00:00” whenever a tape is  
reinserted.  
• The counter stops counting when it comes to a portion  
with no recording.  
• The counter resets to “0:00:00” after ten hours, and  
starts recounting.  
• When playback does not start even if you insert a tape  
with its safety tab removed, set “VCR Function” –  
“Auto Play” of “Features” to “On” in the “Setup”  
display (page 101).  
1 Press VIDEO to operate the VCR.  
2 Insert a tape.  
Playback starts automatically if you insert a  
tape with its safety tab removed.  
• If you switch to the VCR while playing a disc, DVD  
playback stops.  
• The VCR does not record in S-VHS format, but will  
play S-VHS tapes by automatically detecting the  
format, but picture quality will be lower than usual S-  
VHS. Image may be unclear if playback options such  
as slow-motion, etc., are used.  
3 Press H PLAY.  
The front panel display shows the playing  
time.  
• Playback of S-VHS tapes recorded in EP (3x) mode is  
not guaranteed.  
• The VCR is not compatible with the PAL or SECAM  
color system. Only NTSC tapes can be played.  
• For simultaneous VHS and DVD operation, see page 9.  
When the tape reaches the end, it will rewind  
automatically.  
,continued  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Adjusting the picture (tracking)  
You can manually adjust tracking if the recording  
quality is too poor to be remedied by the VCR’s  
automatic tracking (a tracking meter appears  
during the automatic tracking).  
Press TRACKING +/–.  
The tracking meter appears.  
Press TRACKING +/– repeatedly until the  
distortion disappears.  
Tracking  
Tracking meter  
To resume automatic tracking  
Press TRACKING + and TRACKING – on the  
recorder at the same time for more than ten  
seconds. Or, eject the tape and reinsert it.  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Playback Options  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
REPLAY/  
ADVANCE  
. PREV  
> NEXT  
H PLAY  
X PAUSE  
Button  
Operation  
• Fast reverses or fast forwards when pressed during stop mode.  
When you hold down during fast reverse or fast forward, you can view the picture.  
• Plays at high speed when briefly pressed during playback.  
When you hold down the button during playback, the high-speed play continues until  
you release the button.  
(fast reverse/fast  
forward)  
Plays in slow motion when pressed in pause mode.  
• Advances one frame for each press in pause mode.  
(slow)  
ADVANCE  
*1  
• Fast forwards the current scene for 30 seconds when pressed during playback.  
*2  
REPLAY  
Replays the previous scene when pressed during playback.  
. PREV/  
Press during playback. Playback speed changes with each press:  
NEXT >  
–×7  
y
–×5  
y
–×3  
y
PAUSE  
y
SLOW y PLAY y ×2  
y
×3  
y
×5  
y
×7  
X PAUSE  
Pauses playback.  
If you pause playback for more than five minutes, playback starts automatically.  
*1  
*2  
Can be pressed up to four times to forward about  
two minutes.  
For 10 seconds in SP or LP mode/for 15 seconds in EP  
mode.  
Notes  
• The sound is muted during playback at various speeds.  
• The picture may show noise during high-speed reverse  
play.  
To resume normal playback, press H PLAY.  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Searching Using Various  
Functions  
Go to Zero  
0:00:00  
The VCR automatically marks the tape with an  
index signal at the point where each recording  
begins.  
You can easily find a specific point using various  
search functions.  
“End Search”: Searches for the beginning of a  
blank space. If no blank space is found, the  
tape will reach the end.  
Note  
During DVD recording, you cannot use VCR search  
functions.  
End search  
0:00:13  
VIDEO  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
M/m/</,,  
“Forward Intro Scan”/“Reverse Intro Scan”:  
Searches for an index mark and plays back for  
about five seconds at that point.  
ENTER  
OPTIONS  
Press H PLAY to view that program. If you  
do not press H PLAY, the VCR  
automatically searches for the next index  
mark, or until it reaches the end of the tape.  
H PLAY  
CLEAR  
1 Press VIDEO to operate the VCR.  
2 Press OPTIONS.  
Scan and play  
–0:00:01  
3 Select a search method from the OPTIONS  
menu, and press ENTER.  
Go To Zero  
End Search  
Notes  
• The VCR may not recognize the end of a blank space  
depending on its length.  
• No index signal is marked if you pause a recording and  
then keep recording the same program. To mark an  
index, press x STOP or change the input source once  
during recording pause.  
Forward Intro Scan  
Reverse Intro Scan  
Move ENTER Enter  
“Go To Zero”: Searches for the 0:00:00 point  
on the tape counter.  
To reset the counter to 0:00:00, press CLEAR.  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Viewing information on the front  
panel display  
You can view the information on the front panel  
display.  
Displaying the Playing Time  
and Play Information  
You can check playback information, such as  
elapsed or remaining time, recording mode, etc.,  
on the TV screen.  
Press TIME/TEXT repeatedly.  
The displays differ depending on the status.  
Example: When playing a tape  
Elapsed time  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
TIME/TEXT  
Remaining tape length  
DISPLAY  
Clock  
Press DISPLAY during playback.  
The information display appears.  
Each time you press the button, the display  
changes as follows:  
Example: When a tape is in stop mode  
Clock  
Tape and disc information/date and time  
m
m
Elapsed time  
Tape information only  
m
m
Remaining tape length  
m
No display  
Input source  
Stop  
Play  
0:05:30  
HQ  
0:30:00  
SP  
Rem 00:25  
Line1  
Rem 01:30  
Line1  
Wed May 02. 2007  
10:10 AM  
A Playing status  
B Time counter (elapsed time)  
C Recording mode  
D Remaining tape length  
E Input source  
F Date and time  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Notes  
Selecting the Sound During  
Playback  
• To play a tape in stereo, you must use the A/V  
connections.  
• When you play a tape recorded in monaural, the sound  
is heard in monaural regardless of the AUDIO setting.  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
AUDIO  
Press AUDIO repeatedly during playback.  
To listen to  
On-screen  
display  
Front panel  
display  
Stereo  
Hi-Fi  
Left  
STEREO  
STEREO  
STEREO  
STEREO*  
Left channel  
Right channel  
Right  
Mono  
Monaural  
sound on the  
normal audio  
track  
* No indicator appears in the front panel display when  
you play a tape without Hi-fi recording.  
How sound is recorded on a video tape  
The VCR records sound onto two separate tracks.  
Hi-fi audio is recorded onto the main track along  
with the picture. Monaural sound is recorded onto  
the normal audio track along the edge of the tape.  
Monaural sound  
Normal audio track  
Hi-fi audio track  
(main track)  
Stereo sound  
(left/right channels)  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Notes  
• Tapes recorded in EP (×3) mode by this VCR cannot be  
played back on VHS video decks with SP mode only.  
• Noise may appear in the image when tapes recorded in  
EP (×3) mode by this VCR are played back on other  
VHS video decks with EP mode.  
VCR Recording  
Before Recording  
Before you start recording…  
• This VCR records in VHS format, not S-VHS  
format.  
• Check that the tape is longer than the recording  
time (page 73).  
• Check that the recorder is connected to a tuner  
such as a cable box or satellite receiver  
(page 12). See also the tuner’s instruction  
manual.  
Notes  
• Timer recordings will start with or without the recorder  
turned on. Once started, the recorder cannot be turned  
off. The recorder automatically turns off after a  
recording has finished.  
• This recorder has the copy guard function. Programs  
that contain a Copy-Never copy guard signal cannot be  
correctly recorded on the VCR.  
To save a recording  
To prevent accidental erasure, break off the safety  
tab as illustrated. To record on the tape again,  
cover the tab hole with adhesive tape.  
Safety tab  
Recording mode  
“EP” (Extended Play) and “SP” (Standard Play) is  
available for recording mode (tape speed). “EP”  
provides recording time three times as long as  
“SP.” However, “SP” produces better picture and  
audio quality.  
Maximum recording time  
Tape Length  
T-120  
SP  
EP  
2 hrs  
6 hrs  
8 hrs  
9 hrs  
T-160  
2 hrs 40 mins  
3 hrs  
T-180  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
(LINE1 or LINE2) by pressing INPUT, and  
then select the channel on the cable box/  
satellite receiver’s side.  
VCR Recording From  
Connected Equipment  
Without the Timer  
5 Press REC MODE repeatedly to select the  
recording mode, “SP” or “EP.”  
For details about the recording mode, see  
6 Press z REC.  
You can record TV programs on the recorder  
through the connected cable box/satellite receiver.  
“REC” appears in the front panel display, and  
recording starts.  
Leave the cable box/satellite receiver turned  
on and do not change the channel you are  
recording.  
DVD  
VIDEO  
CH +/–  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
INPUT  
To stop recording  
Press x STOP.  
DISPLAY  
To pause recording  
Press X PAUSE.  
To restart recording, press X PAUSE again.  
If you pause recording for more than five minutes,  
recording stops automatically.  
H PLAY  
x STOP  
X PAUSE  
REC MODE  
z REC  
To watch a DVD while recording  
Press DVD to operate the DVD recorder, insert a  
disc, and press H PLAY.  
z Hints  
• Tape information displayed on the TV screen will not  
be recorded on the tape.  
• You can turn off the TV during recording.  
1 Turn on the recorder and the connected  
cable box/satellite receiver.  
Notes  
• You cannot change the recording mode or input source  
while recording.  
• If you insert a tape with its safety tab removed, the tape  
is ejected when you press z REC.  
2 Press VIDEO to operate the VCR.  
3 Insert a tape with its safety tab in place.  
Recording using the Quick Timer  
(One-touch Timer Recording)  
You can set the recorder to record in 30-minute  
increments.  
4 Press CH +/– or INPUT repeatedly to select  
the channel or input source you want to  
record.  
1 Press VIDEO to operate the VCR.  
• When using the cable box/satellite receiver  
control, select the channel by pressing  
CH +/– on this recorder’s remote. The  
recorder’s input is switched to the connected  
input (LINE1 or LINE2). You can also use  
the number buttons.  
2 Press z REC repeatedly to set the  
duration.  
Each press increases the time by 30 minutes,  
up to six hours.  
(Normal  
recording)  
0:30  
1:00  
5:30 6:00  
• When not using the cable box/satellite  
receiver control, select the connected input  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
c” and “OTR” light up, and the remaining  
recording time appears in the front panel  
display.  
When the time counter reaches “0:00,” the  
recorder stops recording and turns off.  
Notes  
• The remaining tape length may not be indicated  
accurately for short tapes such as T-20 or T-30, or tapes  
recorded in LP mode.  
• After DISPLAY is pressed, it may take one minute for  
the remaining tape length to appear.  
To cancel the Quick Timer  
Press z REC repeatedly until the counter appears  
in the front panel display. The recorder returns to  
normal recording mode.  
To stop recording  
Press x STOP twice.  
Checking the remaining tape length  
You can check recording information, such as  
remaining tape length or recording mode, etc.  
Press DISPLAY while recording.  
The information display appears.  
Press the button repeatedly to change the display  
Record  
0:30:00  
SP  
Rem 01:30  
Line1  
A Recording status  
B Time counter  
C Recording mode  
D Remaining tape length  
E Input source  
To check the remaining tape length, set “VCR  
Function” – “Tape Length” of “Features” in the  
“Setup” display correctly (page 101).  
z Hint  
You can view the information also in the front panel  
display. Press TIME/TEXT repeatedly to change the  
display. Note that TIME/TEXT does not work during  
One-touch Timer Recording.  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3 Press TIMER.  
VCR Timer Recording From  
Connected Equipment  
Timer – Standard  
10:10 AM  
No Rec To  
No.01  
01
Dae  
Start  
End  
Source Mode Edit  
02 Media Date  
Start  
End  
Ch  
Mode  
03
VCR  
Today  
09 00  
:
10 : 00  
Line1  
SP  
PM  
PM  
04
05
06
You can set the timer for a total of 12 programs  
together with DVD and VCR timer recording, up  
to one month in advance.  
If you record from connected equipment that has a  
timer function, you can use the Synchro Rec  
function (page 80).  
1
2
3
4
5
6
4 Select an item using </, and adjust  
using M/m.  
Note  
Do not operate your cable box or satellite receiver just  
before or during a timer recording. This may prevent the  
accurate recording of a program.  
A “Media”: Select “VCR.”  
B “Date”: Sets the date using M.  
To record the same program every day or  
the same day every week, press m.  
The item changes as follows:  
VIDEO  
Today y Sun-Sat (Sunday to Saturday)  
y Mon-Sat (Monday to Saturday) y  
Mon-Fri (Monday to Friday) y Sun  
(every Sunday) y Mon (every Monday)  
y y Sat (every Saturday) y  
1 month later y y Today  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
SYSTEM  
MENU  
TIMER  
M/m/</,,  
ENTER  
C “Start”: Sets the start time.  
D “End”: Sets the stop time.  
E “Ch”: Selects the channel or input  
source.  
x STOP  
• When using the cable box/satellite  
receiver control, select the channel.  
• When not using the cable box/satellite  
receiver control, select the input, LINE1  
or LINE2. Select the channel on the  
connected cable box/satellite receiver’s  
side before the timer recording starts.  
1 Press VIDEO to operate the VCR.  
2 Insert a tape with its safety tab in place.  
F “Mode”: Selects the recording mode;  
“SP” or “EP.” To use the Rec Mode  
Adjust function (page 79), select  
“AUTO.”  
If you make a mistake, select the item and  
change the setting.  
5 Press ENTER.  
The Timer List menu (page 81) appears. The  
c indicator lights up in the front panel  
display, and the recorder is ready to start  
recording.  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
• If the c indicator flashes in the front panel  
display, check that a tape with its safety tab  
in place is inserted.  
• If timer settings overlap, a message appears.  
To change or cancel a timer recording, select  
“Edit” from the Timer List (page 81).  
“Tape Length” of “Features” in the “Setup”  
display (page 101)).  
z Hints  
• When the start time and the channel or input source to  
be recorded are the same but the “Media” setting  
differs, the program is recorded to both the DVD disc  
and the VHS tape.  
• You can also turn on the Timer programming menu  
from the System Menu. Press SYSTEM MENU to  
select “Timer,” and select “Timer-Standard.”  
6 Press SYSTEM MENU to turn off the menu.  
There is no need to turn off the recorder before  
the timer recording starts.  
Leave the cable box/satellite receiver turned  
on and do not change the channel selected on  
the cable box/satellite receiver until the  
recorder finishes the timer recording.  
Notes  
• Even when correctly set, the program may not be  
recorded if another recording is underway, or other  
prioritized timer setting overlaps.  
• You cannot record on a tape with its safety tab  
removed.  
• Before the timer recording starts, “TIMER REC”  
flashes in the front panel display.  
• The recorder automatically turns off when a timer  
recording finishes, even if the recording started with  
the recorder turned on.  
To stop recording  
Press x STOP twice.  
If timer settings overlap  
The program that starts first has priority and the  
second program starts recording only after the first  
program has finished. If the programs start at the  
same time, the program listed first in the menu has  
priority. If the end time of one setting and the start  
time of another timer setting is the same, the  
beginning of the program that starts later will be  
cut.  
7:00  
8:00  
9:00  
10:00  
Program 1  
Program 2  
will be cut off  
7:00  
8:00  
9:00  
10:00  
Program 1  
Program 2  
will be cut off  
To change or cancel timer recording  
To use the Rec Mode Adjust function  
If the remaining tape length is too short for the  
current recording, the VCR automatically changes  
the recording mode from SP to EP.  
When setting the timer, select “AUTO” in  
“Mode,” and check that the “Tape Length” setting  
is correct for the inserted tape (“VCR Function” -  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
8 Select “to VIDEO,” and press ENTER.  
Recording From Connected  
Equipment With a Timer  
(Synchro Rec)  
9 Press SYSTEM MENU to turn off the menu.  
10 Set the timer on the connected equipment  
to the time of the program you want to  
record, and turn it off.  
11 Press SYNCHRO REC.  
The SYNCHRO REC indicator lights up on  
the front panel and the recorder stands by for  
Synchro-Rec.  
You can set the recorder to automatically record  
programs from connected equipment that has a  
timer function (such as a satellite tuner). Connect  
the equipment to the LINE 1 IN jacks on the rear  
of the recorder (page 13).  
When the connected equipment turns on, the  
recorder starts recording a program from the LINE  
1 IN jacks.  
The recorder starts recording when a signal is  
received from the connected equipment.  
When the connected equipment turns off, the  
recording stops and the recorder turns off.  
To stop recording  
Press x STOP twice.  
VIDEO  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
To cancel Synchro-Rec function  
Press SYNCHRO REC before recording starts.  
The SYNCHRO REC indicator on the recorder  
turns off.  
SYSTEM  
MENU  
If you press SYNCHRO REC during Synchro-  
Rec, the recording stops, the SYNCHRO REC  
indicator turns off, and the recorder turns off.  
M/m/</,,  
ENTER  
If the timer settings of a Synchro-Recording  
and another timer recording overlap  
x STOP  
Regardless of whether or not the program is a  
Synchro-Rec program, the program that starts first  
has priority and the second program starts  
recording only after the first program has finished.  
If the end time of one setting and the start time of  
another timer setting is the same, the beginning of  
the program that starts later will be cut.  
REC MODE  
SYNCHRO  
REC  
7:00  
8:00  
9:00  
10:00  
1 Press VIDEO to operate the VCR.  
Program 1  
Program 2  
2 Insert a tape with its safety tab in place.  
3 Press REC MODE repeatedly to select the  
recording mode, “SP” or “EP.”  
will be cut off  
4 Press SYSTEM MENU while the recorder is  
in stop mode.  
5 Select “Setup,” and press ENTER.  
6 Select “Features,” and press ENTER.  
The “Features” setup appears.  
7 Select “Synchro Recording,” and press  
ENTER.  
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Notes  
Changing or Canceling VCR  
Timer Settings (Timer List)  
• The recorder starts recording only after detecting the  
video signal from the connected equipment. The  
beginning of the program may not be recorded  
regardless of whether or not the recorder’s power is on  
or off.  
• To use the connected equipment during Synchro-Rec  
standby, cancel the standby mode by pressing  
SYNCHRO REC. To return to standby mode again, be  
sure to turn off the equipment and press SYNCHRO  
REC, before Synchro-Rec starts.  
You can change or cancel timer settings using the  
Timer List menu.  
• The Synchro-Rec function does not work with some  
tuners. For details, see the tuner’s operating  
instructions.  
• After a recording has finished, the recorder enters the  
Synchro-Rec standby mode until the SYNCHRO REC  
indicator turns off.  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
SYSTEM  
MENU  
• You cannot record on a tape with its safety tab  
removed.  
M/m/</,,  
ENTER  
• If Synchro-Rec starts with the recorder turned on, the  
recorder will turn off when the recording ends.  
O RETURN  
1 Press SYSTEM MENU.  
The System Menu appears.  
2 Select “Timer,” and press ENTER.  
3 Select “Timer List,” and press ENTER.  
Timer List  
10:10 AM  
No. Media  
Date  
04/15  
04/30  
Start  
End  
Ch  
Mode Edit  
01 VCR  
02 VCR  
09:00PM  
09:15PM  
10:00PM  
09:45PM  
Line1  
Line1  
SP  
SP  
03 ---  
04 ---  
05 ---  
06 ---  
--/--  
--/--  
--/--  
--/--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
----  
----  
----  
----  
---  
---  
---  
---  
Timer information displays the recording  
date, time, recording mode, etc.  
If there are more than six timer settings, press  
m to display the next page.  
,continued  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
• You cannot change the timer settings for a recording  
currently underway.  
• The Timer List displays both the DVD recorder and  
VCR timer settings.  
4 Select the timer setting you want to change  
or cancel, and press ENTER.  
The sub-menu appears.  
Timer List  
10:10 AM  
No. Media  
Date  
04/15  
04/30  
Start  
End  
Ch  
Mode Edit  
Edit  
01 VCR  
02 VCR  
09:00PM  
09:15PM  
10:00PM  
09:45PM  
Line1  
Line1  
E
rase  
03 ---  
04 ---  
05 ---  
06 ---  
--/--  
--/--  
--/--  
--/--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
----  
----  
----  
----  
---  
---  
---  
---  
5 Select one of the options, and press  
ENTER.  
“Edit”: Changes the timer setting.  
Select an item using </, and adjust using  
M/m. Press ENTER.  
Timer – Standard  
10:10 AM  
No Rec To  
Date  
Start  
End  
Source Mode Edit  
No.01  
01
02Media Date  
StartEndCh  
Mode  
03
VCR  
04/15  
09 00  
:
10 : 00  
Line1  
SP  
PM  
PM  
04
05
06
“Erase”: Erases the timer setting.  
Select “OK” and press ENTER when asked  
for confirmation.  
Timer List  
10:10 AM  
No Rec To  
Date  
Start  
End  
Source Mode Edit  
01
02
Do you want to erase “No.01”?  
03
04
05
06
OK  
Cancel  
6 Press SYSTEM MENU to turn off the Timer  
List.  
To return to the previous display  
Press O RETURN.  
Notes  
• Even when correctly set, the program may not be  
recorded if another recording is underway, or other  
prioritized timer setting overlaps. For priority, see  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Notes  
Recording From Another  
VCR or Similar Device  
• A video game image may not be recorded clearly.  
• You cannot record on a tape with its safety tab  
removed.  
• During recording or recording pause, you cannot  
change the recording mode.  
• You cannot change the input source during recording.  
You can record from a connected VCR or similar  
device. For connection details, see “Connecting  
VIDEO  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
INPUT  
x STOP  
z REC  
REC MODE  
1 Press VIDEO to operate the VCR.  
2 Insert a tape with its safety tab in place.  
3 Press INPUT repeatedly to select the input  
source (LINE1 or LINE2) according to the  
connection you made.  
4 Press REC MODE repeatedly to select the  
recording mode, “SP” or “EP.”  
5 Insert the source tape into the connected  
equipment and set to playback pause.  
6 Press z REC on this recorder and the  
pause or play button on the connected  
equipment at the same time.  
Recording starts.  
To stop recording, press x STOP on this  
recorder.  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
1 Press DVD and insert a recordable disc.  
To select the recording mode, press REC  
MODE repeatedly (see page 46).  
Dubbing (TAPE y DVD)  
2 Insert a source VHS tape.  
Dubbing From a VHS Tape to  
a DVD  
3 Press VIDEO to operate the VCR.  
4 Start playing the VHS tape, and then press  
x STOP or X PAUSE at the point where  
you want to start dubbing.  
+
-
-
+
R
-
-
RVideo  
RWVR RWVideo  
RVR  
RW  
To select VCR sound, press AUDIO during  
playback (see page 74).  
You can easily record (dub) a VHS tape to a disc.  
Before dubbing, make the necessary audio settings  
on the VCR.  
5 Press T VIDEO on the recorder.  
Dubbing starts.  
How titles and chapters are created  
The recorder takes each recording on the VHS tape  
and automatically divides them into titles as they  
are dubbed to a disc. These titles are then further  
divided into chapters at either 5 or 15-minute  
intervals, according to the “DVD Auto Chapter”  
setting of “Features” in the “Setup” display.  
To stop dubbing  
Press x STOP.  
Note that it may take a few seconds for the  
recorder to stop dubbing.  
To play discs recorded with this recorder on  
other DVD equipment  
DVD  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
Finalize the disc (see page 88).  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
To dub using the on-screen menu  
1
2
After step 4 above, press SYSTEM MENU.  
SYSTEM  
MENU  
Select “Dubbing” from the System Menu, and  
press ENTER.  
M/m/</,,  
ENTER  
Dubbing  
10:10 AM  
Title List  
Timer  
Simple Dubbing  
H PLAY  
Program Dubbing  
DV/D8 Dubbing  
x STOP  
Edit  
X PAUSE  
REC MODE  
Dubbing  
Disc Setting  
Setup  
3
4
Select “Simple Dubbing,” and press ENTER.  
Dubbing  
10:10 AM  
Title List  
Timer  
Simple Dubbing  
VIDEO --> DVD  
DVD --> VIDEO  
TVIDEO  
Program Dubbing  
DV/D8 Dubbing  
Edit  
Dubbing  
Disc Setting  
Setup  
Select “VIDEO t DVD,” and press ENTER.  
The display asks for confirmation.  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
5
Select “Yes,” and press ENTER.  
Dubbing starts.  
Dubbing From a DVD to a  
VHS Tape  
z Hints  
• A black (no signal) screen at the end of the dubbed disc  
is not a malfunction. This screen is recorded if a time  
discrepancy exists between the disc and tape when the  
recording is stopped.  
+
RW  
-
-
+
R
-
-
RVideo  
RWVR RWVideo  
RVR  
DVD RAM  
• When dubbing a VHS tape to a DVD, the VHS tape  
counter value may differ slightly from the DVD  
recording time.  
You can record (dub) a DVD title to a VHS tape.  
Note that when you record copy-protected  
software to a tape, picture may appear disrupted  
when you play back the tape.  
• VCR playback sound is output during dubbing.  
You can also select titles or scenes and dub them  
Before dubbing, make the necessary audio settings  
on the DVD recorder.  
Notes  
• Dubbing cannot be made when:  
– using a non-recordable DVD.  
– using VHS software with copy guard functions.  
• Dubbing stops when:  
– the VHS tape reaches the end and stops.  
– the VHS video deck or the DVD deck is stopped.  
– the disc remaining time runs out.  
• The System Menu, OPTIONS menu, and information  
display are not displayed during dubbing.  
• Copyrights  
– Recordings made from VHS tapes and other  
copyrighted material are solely for individual  
enjoyment, and other unauthorized use is prohibited  
under copyright law.  
– Unauthorized editing of copyrighted material is  
prohibited under copyright law.  
DVD  
VIDEO  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
SUBTITLE  
AUDIO  
TOP MENU  
SYSTEM  
MENU  
TITLE LIST  
M/m/</,,  
ENTER  
O RETURN  
./>  
H PLAY  
x STOP  
X PAUSE  
REC MODE  
DVDt  
1 Press VIDEO and insert a VHS tape with its  
safety tab in place.  
To select the recording mode, SP or EP, press  
REC MODE repeatedly (see page 75).  
,continued  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
dubbing. Otherwise the disc’s menu is  
recorded until the tape reaches its end.  
2 Insert a source disc.  
3 Press DVD to operate the DVD recorder.  
4 Press TOP MENU or TITLE LIST to select a  
z Hints  
title.  
• The brightness of the playback picture may differ from  
normal DVD playback picture.  
• The DVD playback time may differ slightly from the  
VHS tape counter value.  
• The sound being played back (main, sub, etc.) is the  
dubbed sound.  
5 Start playing the DVD, and then press x  
STOP or X PAUSE at the point where you  
want to start dubbing.  
To select DVD sound, language, or subtitle,  
press AUDIO or SUBTITLE during playback  
Notes  
• Dubbing stops when:  
6 Press DVD t on the recorder.  
– the DVD is played back to the end and stops.  
– the DVD deck or the VHS video deck is stopped.  
– the tape remaining time runs out.  
Dubbing starts.  
• The System Menu, OPTIONS menu, and information  
display are not displayed during dubbing.  
• Copyrights  
To stop dubbing  
Press x STOP.  
Note that it may take a few seconds for the  
recorder to stop dubbing.  
– Recordings made from discs and other copyrighted  
material are solely for individual enjoyment, and  
other unauthorized use is prohibited under copyright  
law.  
– Unauthorized editing of copyrighted material is  
prohibited under copyright law.  
To dub using the on-screen menu  
1
2
After step 5 above, press SYSTEM MENU.  
Select “Dubbing” from the System Menu, and  
press ENTER.  
Dubbing selected titles and scenes  
(Program Dubbing)  
You can select titles or scenes from a DVD, and  
dub the contents to a VHS tape all at once.  
Dubbing  
10:10 AM  
Title List  
Timer  
Simple Dubbing  
Program Dubbing  
DV/D8 Dubbing  
Edit  
1 Press VIDEO and insert a VHS tape with its  
Dubbing  
Disc Setting  
Setup  
safety tab in place.  
To select the recording mode, SP or EP, press  
REC MODE repeatedly (see page 75).  
2 Press DVD and insert a source disc.  
To select DVD sound, language, or subtitle,  
press AUDIO or SUBTITLE during playback  
3
Select “Simple Dubbing,” and press ENTER.  
Dubbing  
10:10 AM  
Title List  
Timer  
Simple Dubbing  
VIDEO --> DVD  
DVD --> VIDEO  
Program Dubbing  
DV/D8 Dubbing  
3 Press SYSTEM MENU.  
The System Menu appears.  
Edit  
Dubbing  
Disc Setting  
Setup  
4 Select “Dubbing,” and press ENTER.  
Dubbing  
10:10 AM  
Title List  
Timer  
Simple Dubbing  
Program Dubbing  
DV/D8 Dubbing  
4
5
Select “DVD t VIDEO,” and press ENTER.  
The display asks for confirmation.  
Edit  
Dubbing  
Disc Setting  
Setup  
Select “Yes,” and press ENTER.  
Dubbing starts.  
If the disc’s menu appears when DVD  
playback finishes, press x STOP to stop  
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
5 Select “Program Dubbing,” and press  
ENTER.  
9 Press ENTER at the start point.  
You can use H PLAY,  
,
./>, x STOP, and X PAUSE to find  
the point.  
Program Dubbing  
10:10 AM  
“End” is selected.  
Title List  
Timer  
Create Dubbing List  
Program Dubbing List  
Scene Dubbing  
10:10 AM  
Edit  
Scene No.01  
Dubbing  
Disc Setting  
Setup  
Start  
End  
Start 00:00:10  
Make  
Finish  
00:00:10  
T
Dubbing List No. 01  
---/--/---- --:--  
End 00:00:00  
6 Select “Create Dubbing List,” and press  
ENTER.  
If you have performed Program Dubbing  
before, the display asks for confirmation. To  
continue, select “Yes” and press ENTER.  
The display for selecting titles appears.  
10 Press ENTER at the end point.  
“Make” is selected.  
To reset the start or end point, select “Start” or  
“End” and repeat from step 9 or 10.  
Create Dubbing List  
1/2 No. Title  
10:10 AM  
11 Press ENTER.  
Length Edit  
To continue, repeat from step 9.  
01 LINE 1  
02 LINE 1  
00:05:04  
00:00:51  
>
>
12 Select “Finish,” and press ENTER.  
The Program Dubbing List appears with the  
selected scene.  
T
LINE  
1
May/02/2007  
03:25 PM  
Program Dubbing List  
10:10 AM  
No. Title  
Length Edit  
00:05:04  
01 LINE 1  
>
Addition  
Erase  
7 Select the title you want to dub, and press  
ENTER.  
The sub-menu appears.  
Check  
T
LINE  
1
To dub the entire title, select “Title Dubbing”  
and press ENTER. The Program Dubbing List  
appears with the selected title. Go to step 13.  
To select a scene to dub, go to step 8.  
May/02/2007  
03:25 PM  
Dubbing  
13 Select an option and press ENTER, if  
necessary.  
8 Select “Scene Dubbing,” and press  
ENTER.  
To add other titles or scenes, select “Addition”  
and press ENTER, and repeat from step 7.  
To cancel the selected title or scene, select  
“Erase” and press ENTER. When asked for  
confirmation, select “OK” and press ENTER.  
To view the selected title or scene, select  
“Check” and press ENTER.  
The display for setting a scene appears.  
“Start” is selected.  
Scene Dubbing  
10:10 AM  
Scene No.01  
Start  
End  
To cancel dubbing, press O RETURN.  
Start 00:00:00  
14 Select “Dubbing,” and press ENTER.  
Make  
Finish  
00:00:07  
Dubbing starts.  
T
Dubbing List No. 01  
---/--/---- --:--  
End 00:00:00  
,continued  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
To stop dubbing  
Press x STOP.  
Note that it may take a few seconds for the  
recorder to stop dubbing.  
Finalizing a Disc (Preparing  
a Disc for Playback on  
Other Equipment)  
z Hints  
• The brightness of the playback picture may differ from  
normal DVD playback picture.  
• The DVD playback time may differ slightly from the  
VHS tape counter value.  
• The sound being played back (main, sub, etc.) is the  
dubbed sound.  
+
+
RW  
-
-
-
-
RVideo  
RWVR RWVideo  
RVR  
R
Finalizing is necessary in order to play discs  
recorded with this recorder on other DVD  
equipment.  
When you finalize a DVD+RW/DVD-RW (Video  
mode)/DVD+R/DVD-R (Video mode), a DVD  
menu will be automatically created, which can be  
displayed on other DVD equipment.  
Before finalizing, check the differences between  
the disc types in the table below.  
Notes  
• Dubbing stops when:  
– the DVD is played back to the end and stops.  
– the DVD deck or the VHS video deck is stopped.  
– the tape remaining time runs out.  
• The System Menu, OPTIONS menu, and information  
display are not displayed during dubbing.  
• Copyrights  
Differences between the disc types  
– Recordings made from discs and other copyrighted  
material are solely for individual enjoyment, and  
other unauthorized use is prohibited under copyright  
law.  
– Unauthorized editing of copyrighted material is  
prohibited under copyright law.  
Discs are automatically finalized when  
removed from the recorder. If you want  
to record on it again, reformat the disc  
(page 67). Note however, that  
reformatting a disc erases all its  
contents.  
+
RW  
• Once you eject the disc, the Program Dubbing List is  
erased.  
Finalizing is unnecessary when playing a  
disc on VR format compatible equipment.  
Even if your other DVD equipment is  
VR format compatible, you may need to  
finalize the disc, especially if the  
-
RWVR  
recording time is short. After finalizing,  
you cannot edit or record on the disc. If  
you want to edit or record on it again,  
unfinalize or reformat the disc (page 67).  
Note however, that reformatting a disc  
erases all its contents.  
Finalizing is necessary in order to play  
on equipment other than this recorder.  
After finalizing, you cannot edit or  
record on the disc. If you want to edit or  
record on it again, unfinalize or reformat  
the disc (page 67). Note however, that  
reformatting a disc erases all its  
contents.  
-
RWVideo  
Finalizing is necessary in order to play  
on equipment other than this recorder.  
The finalized discs can be played on  
other VR mode compatible players.  
After finalizing, you cannot further edit  
or record on the disc.  
-
RVR  
Finalizing is necessary in order to play  
on equipment other than this recorder.  
After finalizing, you cannot further edit  
or record on the disc.  
+
R
-
RVideo  
88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DVD  
Disc will be finalized.  
Do you want to continue ?  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
OK  
Cancel  
SYSTEM  
MENU  
7 Select “OK,” and press ENTER.  
M/m/</,,  
ENTER  
The recorder starts finalizing the disc.  
To turn off the display  
Press SYSTEM MENU.  
To unfinalize a DVD-RW (VR mode)  
If you cannot record or edit on a DVD-RW (VR  
mode) that has been finalized, unfinalize the disc  
by selecting “Unfinalize” in step 6 above.  
1 Press DVD to operate the DVD recorder.  
2 Insert a disc.  
z Hints  
• You can check whether the disc has been finalized or  
not. If you cannot select “Finalize” in step 6 above, the  
disc has already been finalized.  
• To check the disc information, select “Disc  
Information” in the “Disc Setting” display and press  
ENTER. See page 67 for details.  
3 Press SYSTEM MENU while the recorder is  
in stop mode.  
The System Menu appears.  
4 Select “Disc Setting,” and press ENTER.  
The “Disc Setting” display appears.  
Notes  
Disc Setting  
10:10 AM  
• Depending on the condition of the disc, the recording,  
or the DVD equipment, discs may not play even if the  
discs are finalized.  
• The recorder may not be able to finalize a disc if it was  
recorded on another recorder.  
Title List  
Timer  
Disc Name  
:
:
:
:
Disc Protect  
Not Protected  
VR Mode  
Disc Format  
Edit  
Disc Finalize  
Disc Information  
Erase All Titles  
Unfinalized  
Dubbing  
Disc Setting  
Setup  
5 Select “Disc Finalize,” and press ENTER.  
The display asks for confirmation.  
Do you want to finalize this disc ?  
Finalize  
Unfinalize  
6 Select “Finalize,” and press ENTER.  
The display asks for confirmation again.  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Connecting a Digital Video  
Camera to the DV IN Jack  
DV/D8 Dubbing (DV/D8 t DVD)  
Before DV/D8 Dubbing  
You can connect a digital video camera to the DV  
IN jack on the recorder to record or edit from a  
DV/D8 format tape. Operation is straightforward  
because the DVD recorder will fast forward and  
rewind the tape for you – you do not need to  
operate your digital video camera. Do the  
following to start using the “DV/D8 Edit”  
functions of this recorder.  
This section explains dubbing with a digital video  
camera via the DV IN jack on the front panel. If  
you want to dub by way of the LINE IN jacks, see  
To record from the DV IN jack  
See the instruction manual supplied with the  
digital video camera as well before connecting.  
The DV IN jack on this recorder conforms to the  
i.LINK standard. You can connect any other  
equipment that has an i.LINK (DV) jack, and  
record digital signals.  
Notes  
Follow the instructions in “Connecting a Digital  
Video Camera to the DV IN Jack,” and then move  
on to the section on dubbing. For more  
information about i.LINK, see “About i.LINK” on  
• The DV IN jack is for input only. It will not output  
signals.  
• You cannot use the DV IN jack when:  
– your digital video camera does not work with this  
recorder. Connect the camera to the LINE IN jack and  
follow the instructions of “Recording From Another  
– the input signal is not in DVC-SD format. Do not  
connect a MICROMV format digital video camera  
even if it has an i.LINK jack.  
z Hint  
If you plan to do additional editing on a disc after the  
initial dub, use the DV IN jack and record on a DVD-RW  
(VR mode) or DVD-R (VR mode). Note that erasing  
unwanted scenes does not free up disc space for DVD-Rs  
(VR mode).  
– the images on the tape contain copy protection  
signals, which limit recording.  
Hookups  
VCR-DVD recorder  
DV IN  
to DV IN  
i.LINK cable  
(not supplied)  
to DV output  
Digital video camera  
: Signal flow  
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
3 Press Z OPEN/CLOSE to close the disc  
tray.  
Dubbing From a DV/D8  
Format Tape to a DVD  
Wait until “LOAD” disappears from the front  
panel display.  
Unused discs are automatically formatted. For  
the DVD-RW/DVD-R’s recording format  
(VR mode or Video mode), see “Formatting a  
+
-
-
+
R
-
-
RVideo  
RWVR RWVideo  
RVR  
RW  
You can record a DV/D8 format tape onto a disc.  
The recorder controls the digital video camera.  
You can fast forward, rewind, play in slow motion,  
and stop the tape to select the scenes using the on-  
screen menu.  
4 Insert the source DV/D8 format tape into  
your digital video camera.  
For the recorder to record or edit, your digital  
video camera must be set to video playback  
mode.  
To simply dub the entire contents of a DV/D8  
format tape (One Touch Dubbing), see page 93.  
How titles and chapters are created  
The dubbed contents on the disc become one title,  
and the title is then divided into chapters at either  
5 or 15-minute intervals, according to the “DVD  
Auto Chapter” setting of “Features” in the “Setup”  
display.  
5 Press INPUT repeatedly to select “DV.”  
6 Press REC MODE repeatedly to select the  
recording mode.  
For details about the recording mode, see  
Z OPEN/  
CLOSE  
DVD  
7 Press SYSTEM MENU while the recorder is  
in stop mode.  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
The System Menu appears.  
INPUT  
8 Select “Setup,” and press ENTER.  
Setup  
No Disc  
10:10 AM  
SYSTEM  
MENU  
Title List  
Clock Set  
Video  
M/m/</,,  
ENTER  
Timer  
Audio  
Edit  
O RETURN  
Features  
Options  
Easy Setup  
Dubbing  
Disc Setting  
Setup  
REC MODE  
9 Select “Audio,” and press ENTER.  
Audio  
Title List  
10:10 AM  
Digital Out  
Downmix  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Dolby Surround  
Timer  
Audio DRC  
Standard  
Auto  
Edit  
Audio (HDMI)  
Scan Audio  
Surround  
Dubbing  
Disc Setting  
Setup  
1 Press DVD to operate the DVD recorder.  
On  
Off  
2 Press Z OPEN/CLOSE, and place a  
DV/D8 Audio Input  
Line Audio Input  
Stereo 1  
Stereo  
recordable disc on the disc tray.  
Recording side facing down  
,continued  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
10 Select “DV/D8 Audio Input,” and press  
ENTER.  
DV Tape Mode  
Audio  
Title List  
10:10 AM  
Digital Out  
Downmix  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Dolby Surround  
Timer  
Audio DRC  
Standard  
Auto  
On  
Edit  
Audio (HDMI)  
Scan Audio  
Surround  
Dubbing  
Disc Setting  
Setup  
If “DV” or “DV Camera Mode” is displayed  
instead of “DV Tape Mode,” check that the  
digital video camera is correctly connected  
and its power turned on, and that its mode is  
set for dubbing.  
Stereo 1  
DV/D8 Audio Input  
Line Audio Input  
Stereo 2  
Mix  
“Stereo 1”: Records original sound only.  
Normally select this when dubbing a DV  
format tape.  
“Stereo 2”: Records additional audio only.  
“Mix”: Records original and additional  
sounds.  
Select “Stereo 2” or “Mix” if you have added  
a second audio channel when recording with  
your digital video camera. For the details, see  
16 Find the dubbing start point on the tape,  
and stop or pause playback.  
Press </, to select m, x, X, y, H, or  
M on the TV screen and press ENTER to  
find the point, and stop or pause with x or X.  
17 Press , to select z on the TV screen, and  
press ENTER.  
Dubbing starts.  
11 Select an option, and press ENTER.  
12 Press O RETURN twice.  
To stop recording  
Select x on the TV screen, and press ENTER.  
Note that it may take a few seconds for the  
recorder to stop recording.  
13 Select “Dubbing,” and press ENTER.  
Dubbing  
10:10 AM  
Title List  
Timer  
Simple Dubbing  
To turn off the display for DV/D8 dubbing  
Press INPUT.  
Program Dubbing  
DV/D8 Dubbing  
Edit  
Dubbing  
Disc Setting  
Setup  
z Hint  
If “DV Camera Mode” appears on the screen, you can use  
z on the TV screen to record the camera image directly  
on the recorder.  
Notes  
14 Select “DV/D8 Dubbing,” and press  
ENTER.  
• If you want to play the disc on other DVD equipment,  
finalize the disc (page 88).  
• You cannot connect more than one piece of digital  
video equipment to the recorder.  
• You cannot record the date, time, or contents of a DV/  
D8 format tape onto the disc.  
DV/D8 Dubbing  
10:10 AM  
Title List  
Timer  
DV/D8 Simple Dubbing  
DV/D8 One Touch Dubbing  
Edit  
• If you record from a DV/D8 format tape with a  
soundtrack that is recorded in multiple sampling  
frequencies (48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, or 32 kHz), no sound,  
or an unnatural sound will be output when playing back  
the sampling frequency switch point on the disc.  
• The recorded picture may be momentarily affected if  
the picture size of the source image changes, or if there  
is nothing recorded on the tape.  
Dubbing  
Disc Setting  
Setup  
15 Select “DV/D8 Simple Dubbing,” and  
press ENTER.  
• Noise may occur when you switch the audio sampling  
mode (48 kHz/16 bits t 32 kHz/12 bits).  
The following display appears.  
92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Dubbing an entire DV/D8 format tape  
to a DVD (One Touch Dubbing)  
-
-
RVideo  
+
-
-
+
R
RVR  
RWVR RWVideo  
RW  
You can record the entire contents of a DV/D8  
format tape onto a disc with a single press of the  
ONE-TOUCH DUBBING button. The recorder  
controls the digital video camera for the whole  
process, and completes the recording.  
ONE-TOUCH DUBBING  
x
1 Follow steps 1 to 11 of “Dubbing From a  
and press SYSTEM MENU to turn off the  
display.  
2 Press ONE-TOUCH DUBBING on the  
recorder.  
The recorder rewinds the tape in the digital  
video camera and then starts recording the  
tape contents from the beginning.  
When playback of the tape stops, One Touch  
Dubbing ends automatically.  
To stop recording  
Press x (stop).  
Note that it may take a few seconds for the  
recorder to stop recording.  
z Hint  
You can also perform One Touch Dubbing when you  
select “DV/D8 One Touch Dubbing” and press ENTER  
DVD” on page 91. Follow the instructions appearing on  
the TV screen.  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
2 Select “Setup,” and press ENTER.  
The “Setup” display appears.  
Settings and Adjustments  
Setup  
No Disc  
10:10 AM  
Title List  
Clock Set  
Video  
Using the Setup Displays  
Timer  
Audio  
Edit  
By using the setup displays, you can make various  
adjustments to items such as picture and sound, as  
well as select a language for the subtitles.  
Features  
Options  
Easy Setup  
Dubbing  
Disc Setting  
Setup  
The setup displays are used in the following way.  
Note  
3 Select “Clock Set,” “Video,” “Audio,”  
“Features,” “Options,” or “Easy Setup,”  
and press ENTER.  
Playback settings stored on the disc take priority over the  
setup display settings, and not all of the functions  
described may work.  
The selected setup display appears.  
Example: “Video” setup  
Video  
Title List  
10:10 AM  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
TV Type  
:
:
:
:
:
:
4:3 Letter Box  
Auto  
HDMI Resolution  
Video (HDMI)  
Black Level  
Timer  
Y Cb Cr  
On  
Edit  
SYSTEM  
MENU  
Dubbing  
Disc Setting  
Setup  
Picture Control  
Progressive  
Standard  
Off  
M/m/</,,  
ENTER  
O RETURN  
4 Select the item you want to set up, and  
press ENTER.  
Available options for the item appear.  
Example: “TV Type”  
Video  
Title List  
10:10 AM  
TV Type  
:
:
:
:
:
:
16:9  
1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the recorder is  
in stop mode.  
4:3 Letter Box  
HDMI Resolution  
Video (HDMI)  
Black Level  
Timer  
4:3 Pan Scan  
The System Menu appears.  
Edit  
On  
Dubbing  
Disc Setting  
Setup  
Picture Control  
Progressive  
Standard  
Off  
Title List (Original)  
Title List  
10:10 AM  
Press ENTER :  
Timer  
Edit  
Title Menu for DVD Title List.  
Dubbing  
Disc Setting  
Setup  
94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Some items display a dialog box that requires  
additional settings.  
Example: When “Parental” in “Options”  
setup is selected.  
Clock Setting (Clock Set)  
The “Clock Set” setup allows you to make clock  
settings for the recorder.  
Create the password  
Title List  
10:10 AM  
1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the recorder is  
in stop mode.  
Timer  
Create the password.  
Edit  
2 Select “Setup,” and press ENTER.  
Dubbing  
Disc Setting  
Setup  
3 Select “Clock Set,” and press ENTER.  
The clock setting display appears.  
Clock Set  
10:10 AM  
5 Select an option, and press ENTER.  
The currently selected option is displayed  
next to the setup item.  
Title List  
Set the time and date manually.  
Month Day  
Year  
Timer  
01  
01  
2007  
Mon  
Edit  
Example: When “16:9” is set.  
Dubbing  
Disc Setting  
Setup  
Hour Min AM/PM  
10 10 AM  
Video  
Title List  
10:10 AM  
:
TV Type  
:
:
:
:
:
:
16:9  
HDMI Resolution  
Video (HDMI)  
Black Level  
Auto  
Timer  
Y Cb Cr  
On  
Edit  
4 Press M/m to set the month, and press ,.  
Set the day, year, hour, minutes, and AM/PM  
in sequence. Press </, to select the item to  
be set, then press M/m to set the item. The day  
of the week is set automatically.  
Dubbing  
Disc Setting  
Setup  
Picture Control  
Progressive  
Standard  
Off  
5 Press ENTER to start the clock.  
To return to the previous display  
Press O RETURN.  
To turn off the display  
Press SYSTEM MENU.  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
16:9  
Video Settings (Video)  
The “Video” setup allows you to adjust items  
related to the image, such as size and color.  
Choose the settings according to the type of TV,  
tuner, or decoder connected to the recorder.  
4:3 Letter Box  
4:3 Pan Scan  
1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the recorder is  
in stop mode.  
2 Select “Setup,” and press ENTER.  
3 Select “Video,” and press ENTER.  
The “Video” setup appears with the following  
options. The default settings are underlined.  
Note  
Depending on the disc, “4:3 Letter Box” may be selected  
automatically instead of “4:3 Pan Scan” or vice versa.  
Video  
Title List  
10:10 AM  
TV Type  
:
:
:
:
:
:
4:3 Letter Box  
Auto  
HDMI Resolution  
Video (HDMI)  
Black Level  
Timer  
HDMI Resolution  
Y Cb Cr  
On  
Selects the type of video signals output from the  
HDMI OUT jack. When you select “Auto”  
(default), the recorder outputs video signals of the  
highest resolution acceptable for your TV. If the  
picture is not clear, unnatural or not to your  
satisfaction, try another option that suits the disc  
and your TV/projector, etc. For details, refer also  
to the instruction manual supplied with the TV/  
projector, etc.  
Edit  
Dubbing  
Disc Setting  
Setup  
Picture Control  
Progressive  
Standard  
Off  
TV Type  
Selects the aspect ratio of the connected TV (4:3  
standard or wide).  
The setting is effective only when you connect a  
HDMI equipped TV to the HDMI OUT jack.  
16:9  
Select this when connecting to a  
wide-screen TV or TV with a  
wide mode function.  
Auto  
Normally, select this.  
1920×1080i  
1280×720P  
720×480P  
Sends 1920×1080i video signals.  
Sends 1280×720p video signals.  
Sends 720×480p video signals.  
4:3 Letter  
Box  
Select this when connecting to a  
4:3 screen TV. Displays a wide  
picture with bands on the upper  
and lower portions of the screen.  
Video (HDMI)  
Selects the type of output from the HDMI OUT  
jack.  
The setting is effective only when you connect a  
HDMI equipped TV to the HDMI OUT jack.  
4:3 Pan  
Scan  
Select this when connecting to a  
4:3 screen TV. Automatically  
displays a wide picture on the  
entire screen and cuts off the  
portions that do not fit.  
Y Cb Cr  
Normally, select this when  
connecting to an HDMI device.  
RGB  
Gives brighter colors and deeper  
black. Select this if colors are  
weak.  
96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Black Level  
On  
Off  
Sets the recorder to output  
progressive signals.  
Selects the black level (setup level) for the video  
signals output from the LINE OUT jacks  
This setting is not effective when the recorder  
outputs progressive signals.  
Outputs video signals in interlace  
format.  
Notes  
On  
Raises the standard black level.  
Select this when the picture  
appears too dark.  
• If you select progressive signals when you connect the  
recorder to a TV that cannot accept the signal in  
progressive format, the image quality will deteriorate.  
In this case, set “Progressive” to “Off.” Or, press DVD  
in stop mode to operate the DVD recorder, and then  
hold down X PAUSE on the recorder for five seconds  
or more.  
Off  
Sets the black level of the output  
signal to the standard level.  
Picture Control  
• When you connect your TV using an HDMI cable, the  
“Progressive” setting is set to “On.”  
Selects the picture control for the video signals  
output from the LINE OUT jacks (page 15).  
You can adjust the video signal of DVD or  
VIDEO CD (with PBC function off) from the  
recorder to obtain the picture quality you want.  
Select the setting that best suits the program you  
are watching.  
Dynamic 1  
Produces a bold dynamic picture  
by increasing the picture contrast  
and the color intensity.  
Dynamic 2  
Produces a more dynamic picture  
than “Dynamic 1” by further  
increasing the picture contrast  
and the color intensity.  
Standard  
Cinema 1  
Displays a standard picture  
(function turned off).  
White colors become brighter  
and black colors become richer,  
and the color contrast is  
increased.  
Cinema 2  
Personal  
Enhances details in dark areas by  
increasing the black level.  
Adjusts “Contrast,” “Brightness,”  
“Color,” and “Hue” using M/m/  
</,.  
z Hint  
When you watch a movie, “Cinema 1” or “Cinema 2” is  
recommended.  
Progressive  
If your TV accepts progressive (480p) format  
signals, you will enjoy accurate color reproduction  
and high quality image.  
Connect your TV to the COMPONENT VIDEO  
OUT jacks (page 17).  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Dolby Digital (DVDs only)  
Selects the type of Dolby Digital signal.  
Audio Settings (Audio)  
D-PCM  
Select this when the recorder  
is connected to an audio  
component lacking a built-in  
Dolby Digital decoder. You  
can select whether the  
The “Audio” setup allows you to adjust the sound  
according to the playback and connection  
conditions.  
signals conform to Dolby  
Surround or not by making  
adjustments to the  
“Downmix” item in “Audio”  
setup (page 99).  
1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the recorder is  
in stop mode.  
2 Select “Setup,” and press ENTER.  
3 Select “Audio,” and press ENTER.  
The “Audio” setup appears with the following  
options. The default settings are underlined.  
Dolby  
Digital  
Select this when the recorder  
is connected to an audio  
component with a built-in  
Dolby Digital decoder.  
Audio  
Title List  
10:10 AM  
Digital Out  
Note  
Downmix  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Dolby Surround  
Timer  
If the HDMI OUT jack is connected to equipment not  
compatible with Dolby Digital signals, D-PCM signals  
will be automatically output, even when “Dolby Digital”  
is selected.  
Audio DRC  
Standard  
Auto  
Edit  
Audio (HDMI)  
Scan Audio  
Surround  
Dubbing  
Disc Setting  
Setup  
On  
Off  
DV/D8 Audio Input  
Line Audio Input  
Stereo 1  
Stereo  
DTS (DVD VIDEOs only)  
Selects whether or not to output DTS signals.  
On  
Select this when the recorder  
is connected to an audio  
component with a built-in  
DTS decoder.  
Digital Out  
The following setup items switch the method of  
outputting audio signals when you connect a  
component such as an amplifier (receiver) to the  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL or  
COAXIAL)/HDMI OUT jack.  
Off  
Select this when the recorder  
is connected to an audio  
component without a built-in  
DTS decoder.  
For connection details, see “Connecting to Your  
Press ENTER, and select “Dolby Digital” or  
“DTS.”  
Note  
Digital Out  
10:10 AM  
If the HDMI OUT jack is connected to equipment not  
compatible with DTS signals, no signal will be output,  
regardless of the “DTS” setting.  
Title List  
Dolby Digital  
DTS  
:
D-PCM
Dolby Digital  
Timer  
Edit  
Dubbing  
Disc Setting  
Setup  
If you connect a component that does not accept  
the selected audio signal, a loud noise (or no  
sound) will come out from the speakers, and may  
affect your ears or cause speaker damage.  
98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Downmix (DVDs only)  
Audio (HDMI) (DVD VIDEOs only)  
Selects the output method from the HDMI OUT  
jack.  
Switches the method for mixing down to two  
channels when you play a DVD which has rear  
sound elements (channels) or is recorded in Dolby  
Digital format. For details on the rear signal  
jacks” on page 19. This function affects the output  
of the following jacks:  
Auto  
Normally, select this.  
Outputs audio signals  
according to the “Dolby  
Digital” or “DTS” settings  
– LINE OUT (AUDIO L/R) jacks  
– AUDIO OUT L/R jacks  
PCM  
Converts Dolby Digital or  
DTS to PCM.  
– DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL or  
COAXIAL)/HDMI OUT jack when “Dolby  
Digital” is set to “D-PCM” (page 98).  
Scan Audio (DVDs only)  
Dolby  
Surround  
Normally select this  
position.  
Multi-channel audio signals  
are output to two channels  
for enjoying surround  
sounds.  
On  
Outputs audio signals during  
FF1 fast-forward of a DVD  
disc with Dolby Digital  
soundtracks.  
Off  
No sound is output during  
FF1 fast-forward.  
Normal  
Multi-channel audio signals  
are downmixed to two  
channels for use with your  
stereo.  
Note  
Sound will be interrupted during Scan Audio.  
To enjoy the surround effect of Dolby Digital, turn  
off the surround settings of this recorder  
Surround  
Turns on the surround function to create virtual  
rear speakers from a stereo TV or two separate  
front speakers (page 19).  
Audio DRC (Dynamic Range Control) (DVDs  
only)  
Off  
No surround effect  
Makes the sound clear when the volume is turned  
down when playing a DVD that conforms to  
“Audio DRC.” This affects the output from the  
following jacks:  
– LINE OUT (AUDIO L/R) jacks  
– AUDIO OUT L/R jacks  
– DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL or  
COAXIAL)/HDMI OUT jack only when  
“Dolby Digital” is set to “D-PCM” (page 98).  
Surround1  
Creates one set of virtual  
surround speakers  
Surround2  
Surround3  
Creates two sets of virtual  
surround speakers  
Creates three sets of virtual  
surround speakers  
Standard  
Normally select this  
position.  
Notes  
• When the playback signal does not contain a signal for  
the surround speakers, the surround effects will be  
difficult to hear.  
• When you select one of the surround modes, turn off  
the surround settings of the connected TV or amplifier  
(receiver).  
TV Mode  
Makes low sounds clear  
even if you turn the volume  
down.  
Wide  
Gives you the feeling of  
Range  
being at a live performance.  
,continued  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
DV/D8 Audio Input  
Recording, Set Top Box  
Control, and VCR Settings  
(Features)  
Stereo 1  
Records original sound only.  
Normally select this when  
dubbing a DV format tape.  
Stereo 2  
Mix  
Records additional audio  
only.  
The “Features” setup allows you to make various  
settings for recording, playback, and the set top  
box control function.  
Records both original and  
additional sounds.  
1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the recorder is  
in stop mode.  
Note  
Select “Stereo 2” or “Mix” if you have added a second  
audio channel when recording with your digital video  
camera.  
2 Select “Setup,” and press ENTER.  
3 Select “Features,” and press ENTER.  
The “Features” setup appears with the  
following options. The default settings are  
underlined.  
Line Audio Input  
When recording from equipment connected to the  
LINE 1 IN or LINE 2 IN jacks to a DVD disc in  
this recorder, select line input audio.  
Features  
10:10 AM  
Title List  
Timer  
Stereo  
Records stereo sound only.  
DVD Auto Chapter  
:
:
5 Min  
VR  
Format DVD-RW  
VCR Function  
Main/Sub  
Records the two different  
soundtracks on DVD-RWs  
(VR mode)/DVD-Rs (VR  
mode). You can select either  
soundtrack when playing  
back the disc.  
Edit  
Synchro Recording  
Set Top Box Control  
:
to DVD  
Dubbing  
Disc Setting  
Setup  
z Hint  
When recording on a disc other than DVD-RWs (VR  
mode)/DVD-Rs (VR mode), select either sound track  
with the connected equipment before recording.  
DVD Auto Chapter  
Automatically divides a recording (a title) into  
chapters by inserting chapter markings at  
specified intervals. The markings are inserted  
while the recording is being made.  
Off  
No chapter mark is inserted.  
5 Min  
Inserts chapter marks at  
approximately 5 minute  
intervals.  
15 Min  
Inserts chapter marks at  
approximately 15 minute  
intervals.  
Note  
Actual intervals may differ depending on the size of the  
recording. The selected setting should be regarded as an  
approximate chapter interval.  
100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Format DVD-RW (DVD-RWs only)  
Selects the recording format for an unused DVD-  
RW, when first inserted.  
Set Top Box Control  
You can control your cable box/satellite receiver  
using the supplied set top box controller. See  
“Step 7: Easy Setup” for details. Press ENTER,  
and select “On” or “Off.”  
VR  
Automatically formats the disc in  
VR mode.  
On  
Turns on the cable box/satellite  
receiver control function. See  
Video  
Automatically formats the disc in  
Video mode.  
VCR Function  
Press ENTER and select “Tape Length,” “Auto  
Play,” or “Auto Repeat.”  
Off  
Turns off the cable box/satellite  
receiver control function. Select  
this if you do not want to use the  
supplied set top box controller.  
Tape Length  
T120  
T160  
T180  
For T-120 or shorter length tapes.  
For T-160 length tapes.  
When “Set Top Box Control” is set to “On,” you  
can make the following settings. Note that when  
you change “Set Top Box Control” to “On” or  
“Off,” all timer recording settings will be  
canceled.  
For T-180 or longer length tapes.  
Auto Play  
On  
Starts playback automatically,  
when you insert a tape with its  
safety tab removed.  
Brand Code  
(page 121) for the brand code for your cable box  
or satellite receiver, and enter the code using the  
number buttons and ENTER.  
Off  
Turns off the function. You need  
to press H PLAY to start  
playback, even if you insert a tape  
with its safety tab removed.  
Connections  
Selects the connection you used for your cable box  
or satellite receiver. Select the connection from  
“Line1” or “Line2.”  
Auto Repeat  
Ch. Digit lock  
Allows you to select whether to fix the digits for  
your cable box or satellite receiver.  
On  
Plays back a tape repeatedly. The  
VCR rewinds the tape to the  
beginning and restarts playback  
automatically.  
Off  
Select this when your cable box or  
satellite receiver only accepts a  
three or more digit channel  
Off  
Turns off the function.  
number. Normally select this.  
Synchro Recording  
Lock to  
2 digits  
Select this only when your cable  
box or satellite receiver only  
accepts a two digit channel  
number.  
to DVD  
Sets the recorder to record  
programs from connected  
equipment that has a timer  
function (such as a satellite tuner)  
to a DVD disc.  
to VIDEO  
Sets the recorder to record  
programs from connected  
equipment that has a timer  
function (such as a satellite tuner)  
to a VHS tape.  
,continued  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Mode for SET button  
Select “Mode 1” or “Mode 2” if your cable box or  
satellite receiver requires pressing an ENTER  
button or a SET button etc., after entering the  
channel number. If “Mode 1” does not work, try  
“Mode 2.” If your cable box or satellite receiver  
does not respond to either setting, contact the  
manufacturer of the cable box or satellite receiver.  
Language, Parental Control  
Settings/Factory Settings  
(Options)  
The “Options” setup allows you to set up other  
operational settings.  
Off  
No code is sent when SET is  
pressed. Normally select this.  
1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the recorder is  
in stop mode.  
Mode 1  
Mode 2  
Sends the channel number you  
entered.  
2 Select “Setup,” and press ENTER.  
Sends the channel number you  
entered.  
3 Select “Options,” and press ENTER.  
The “Options” setup appears with the  
following options. The default settings are  
underlined.  
Options  
10:10 AM  
Title List  
Timer  
Language  
Parental  
Front Display  
Command Mode  
Factory Setting  
:
:
Auto  
Edit  
DVD 3  
Dubbing  
Disc Setting  
Setup  
Language  
OSD (On-Screen Display)  
Switches the display language on the screen.  
Disc Menu (DVD VIDEOs only)  
Switches the language for the DVD menu.  
Audio (DVD VIDEOs only)  
Switches the language of the soundtrack.  
When you select “Original,” the language given  
priority in the disc is selected.  
Subtitle (DVD VIDEOs only)  
Switches the language of the subtitles recorded on  
the disc.  
When you select “Auto,” the subtitle language  
changes according to the language you selected  
for the soundtrack. See page 120 for an  
explanation of the language abbreviations.  
Note  
If you select a language in “Disc Menu,” “Subtitle,” or  
“Audio” that is not recorded on the DVD VIDEO, one of  
the recorded languages will be automatically selected.  
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
2
Select “Rating Level,” and press ENTER.  
The selection items for “Rating Level” are  
displayed.  
Parental (DVD VIDEOs only)  
Playback of some DVD VIDEOs can be limited  
according to a predetermined level, such as the age  
of the users. Scenes may be blocked or replaced  
with different scenes.  
Parental  
10:10 AM  
Off
Title List  
Timer  
Rating Level  
Change Password  
:
1
After step 3 above, select “Parental,” and  
press ENTER.  
Level 8 (Adults)  
Level 7  
Edit  
Level 6  
• If you have not entered a password, the  
display for registering a new password  
appears.  
Enter a 4-digit password using the number  
buttons.  
Dubbing  
Disc Setting  
Setup  
Level 5  
Level 4  
Level 3  
Level 2  
The lower the value, the stricter the limitation.  
Create the password  
Title List  
10:10 AM  
3
Select the level, and press ENTER.  
The Parental setting is complete.  
Timer  
Create the password.  
Edit  
• To cancel the Parental setting for the disc, set  
“Rating Level” to “Off” in step 3.  
Dubbing  
Disc Setting  
Setup  
• To change the password, select “Change  
Password” in step 2, and press ENTER. When  
the display for registering a password appears,  
enter a new four-digit password using the  
number buttons.  
The display for confirming the password  
appears.  
Re-enter the password.  
z Hint  
Create the password  
Title List  
10:10 AM  
If you enter a wrong number, press < or CLEAR and re-  
enter.  
Timer  
Confirm the password.  
Notes  
Edit  
• If you forget your password, select “Factory Setting” of  
“Options” in the “Setup” display.  
• Playback of discs without the Parental Control function  
cannot be limited on this recorder.  
Dubbing  
Disc Setting  
Setup  
• Depending on the disc, you may be asked to change the  
Parental Control level while playing the disc. In this  
case, enter your password, then change the level.  
• When you have already registered a  
password, the display for entering the  
password appears.  
Enter a 4-digit password using the number  
buttons.  
Front Display  
Adjusts the lighting of the front panel display.  
Enter the password  
Title List  
10:10 AM  
Auto  
Adjusts to low lighting when  
power is off.  
Timer  
Enter the password.  
Bright  
Dimmer  
Maintains bright lighting  
when power is off.  
Edit  
Dubbing  
Disc Setting  
Setup  
Maintains low lighting  
regardless of whether power  
is on or off.  
Off  
Turns off the lighting when  
power is off. Maintains the  
lighting when power is on.  
,continued  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Command Mode  
Changes the command mode of this recorder if  
other DVD equipment is assigned the same  
command mode. Be sure to match the command  
mode of the supplied remote to the setting made  
Easy Setup  
(Resetting the Recorder)  
Select this to run the Easy Setup program.  
1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the recorder is  
in stop mode.  
DVD 1  
Select this if the default  
command mode conflicts  
with other DVD equipment.  
2 Select “Setup,” and press ENTER.  
3 Select “Easy Setup,” and press ENTER.  
DVD 2  
Select this if the default  
command mode conflicts  
with other DVD equipment.  
Easy Setup  
10:10 AM  
Follow the guide to make initial settings.  
Before you start,  
Check that you have made all necessary connections.  
DVD 3  
The default command mode  
of the recorder.  
Start  
Cancel  
Factory Setting  
Allows you to return the setup settings to their  
default settings. Note that all of your previous  
settings will be lost.  
4 Select “Start,” and press ENTER.  
1
2
After step 3 on page 102, select “Factory  
Setting,” and press ENTER.  
5 Follow the instructions for Easy Setup  
(page 23) from step 5.  
Select “Start,” and press ENTER.  
The setup settings return to their default  
settings.  
3
Press ENTER when “Finish” appears.  
The power automatically turns off and then on  
again, and the recorder is reset to the factory  
settings.  
When the “Easy Setup” display appears,  
follow the instructions for Easy Setup  
(page 23) from step 4.  
104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
mode to operate the DVD recorder and then hold  
down X PAUSE on the recorder for five seconds  
or more.  
Additional Information  
There is no picture or the picture noise appears  
when connected to the DV IN jack.  
, Try the following: 1Turn the recorder off and  
on again. 2Turn the connected equipment off  
and on again. 3Disconnect and then connect the  
i.LINK cable again.  
Troubleshooting  
If you experience any of the following difficulties  
while using the recorder, use this troubleshooting  
guide to help remedy the problem before  
requesting repairs. Should any problem persist,  
consult your nearest Sony dealer.  
There is no picture or the picture noise appears  
when connected to the HDMI OUT jack.  
, Try the following: 1Turn the recorder off and  
on again. 2Turn the connected equipment off  
and on again. 3Disconnect and then connect the  
HDMI cord again.  
Power  
The power does not turn on.  
, Check that the AC power cord is connected  
securely.  
, If the HDMI OUT jack is used for video output,  
changing the “HDMI Resolution” setting in the  
“Video” setup may solve the problem (page 96).  
Connect the TV and the recorder using a video  
jack other than the HDMI OUT, and switch the  
TV’s input to the connected video input so that  
you can see the on-screen displays. Change the  
“HDMI Resolution” setting in the “Video” setup,  
and switch the TV’s input back to HDMI. If the  
picture still does not appear, repeat the steps and  
try other options.  
Picture  
There is no picture.  
, Re-connect all connecting cords securely.  
, The connecting cords are damaged.  
, Check the connection to your TV (page 12).  
, Switch the input selector on your TV (such as to  
“VIDEO”) so that the signal from the recorder  
appears on the TV screen.  
, The recorder is connected to an input device that  
is not HDCP compliant (page 16).  
Picture noise appears.  
, Check the connection to your TV (page 12) and  
switch the input selector on your TV so that the  
signal from the recorder appears on the TV  
screen.  
The channel on the cable box/satellite receiver  
has been changed.  
, The set top box controller is connected and “Set  
Top Box Control” is set to “On.” Check the “Set  
Top Box Control” settings in “Features” setup  
, If the picture output signal from your recorder  
passes through your VCR to get to your TV, or if  
you are connected to a combination TV/VIDEO  
player, the copy-protection signal applied to  
some DVD programs could affect picture  
quality. If you still experience this problem even  
when you connect your recorder directly to your  
TV, try connecting your recorder to your TV’s  
S VIDEO input.  
, You have set the recorder to progressive format  
even though your TV cannot accept the  
progressive signal. In this case, set “Progressive”  
to “Off” in “Video” setup (page 97), or press  
DVD in stop mode to operate the DVD recorder  
and then hold down X PAUSE on the recorder  
for five seconds or more.  
The picture from equipment connected to the  
recorder’s input jack does not appear on the  
screen.  
, If the equipment is connected to the LINE 1 IN  
jack, select “LINE1” in the front panel display by  
pressing INPUT.  
If the equipment is connected to the LINE 2 IN  
jacks, select “LINE2” in the front panel display  
by pressing INPUT.  
, Even if your TV is compatible with progressive  
format (480p) signals, the image may be affected  
when you set the recorder to progressive format.  
In this case, set “Progressive” to “Off” in  
“Video” setup (page 97), or press DVD in stop  
,continued  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
The playback picture or TV program from the  
equipment connected through the recorder is  
distorted.  
, If the playback picture output from a DVD  
player, VCR, or tuner goes through your recorder  
before reaching your TV, the copy-protection  
signal applied to some programs could affect  
picture quality. Disconnect the playback  
equipment in question and connect it directly to  
your TV.  
The sound volume is low.  
, The sound volume is low on some DVDs.  
The sound volume may improve if you set  
“Audio DRC” in “Audio” setup to “Wide  
Range” (page 99).  
An alternate audio track cannot be recorded or  
played.  
, If you have connected an AV amplifier to the  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL or  
COAXIAL) jack and want to change the audio  
track for a DVD-RW (VR mode)/DVD-R (VR  
mode) during playback, set “Dolby Digital” in  
“Audio” setup to “D-PCM” (page 98).  
The picture does not fill the screen.  
, Set “TV Type” in “Video” setup to fit the aspect  
ratio of your TV (page 96).  
, When recording to a disc other than DVD-RWs  
(VR mode)/DVD-Rs (VR mode), set “Line  
Audio Input” in “Audio” setup to “Stereo.”  
The picture does not fill the screen, even  
though the aspect ratio is set in “TV Type” in  
“Video” setup.  
DVD Playback  
, The aspect ratio of the disc is fixed on your DVD.  
The disc does not play.  
, The disc is upside down. Insert the disc with the  
labeled side facing up.  
Sound  
There is no sound.  
, The disc is not correctly inserted.  
, Moisture has condensed inside the recorder.  
Remove the disc and leave the recorder turned on  
for about half an hour until the moisture  
evaporates.  
, If the disc was recorded on another recorder, the  
recorder cannot play the disc if it was not  
finalized (page 88).  
, Re-connect all connections securely.  
, The connecting cord is damaged.  
, The input source setting on the amplifier or the  
connection to the amplifier is incorrect.  
, The recorder is in reverse play, fast-forward,  
slow motion, or pause mode.  
, If the audio signal does not come through the  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL or  
COAXIAL) jack, check the “Audio” setup  
settings (page 98).  
The disc does not start playback from the  
beginning.  
, Resume play was activated (page 38).  
, You have inserted a disc whose Title menu or  
DVD menu automatically appears on the TV  
screen when it is first inserted. Use the menu to  
start playback.  
No sound is output from the HDMI OUT jack.  
, Try the following: 1Turn the recorder off and  
on again. 2Turn the connected equipment off  
and on again. 3Disconnect and then connect the  
HDMI cord again.  
, The HDMI OUT jack is connected to a DVI  
device (DVI jacks do not accept audio signals).  
, The equipment connected to the HDMI OUT  
jack does not conform to the audio signal format.  
The recorder starts playing the disc  
automatically.  
, The DVD VIDEO features an auto playback  
function.  
Sound is noisy.  
, When playing a CD with DTS soundtracks, noise  
will come from the LINE OUT (AUDIO L/R) or  
AUDIO OUT L/R jacks (page 37).  
Playback stops automatically.  
, If the disc has an auto pause signal, the recorder  
stops playback at the auto pause signal.  
106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
, When playing a disc containing JPEG image  
Some functions such as Stop, Search, or Slow-  
motion Play cannot be performed.  
files, “Photo” is selected (page 41).  
, Depending on the disc, you may not be able to do  
some of the operations above. See the instruction  
manual supplied with the disc.  
, While the recorder is reading disc information,  
playback operations will not work.  
The JPEG image file cannot be played.  
, The DATA CD is not recorded in a JPEG format  
that conforms to ISO9660 Level 1/Level 2.  
, The JPEG image file does not have the extension  
“.JPG” or “.JPEG.”  
, The data is not formatted in JPEG even though it  
has the extension “.JPG” or “JPEG.”  
, The length or width of the image is more than  
4,720 dots.  
, When playing a disc containing MP3 audio  
tracks, “Music” is selected (page 42).  
The language for the soundtrack cannot be  
changed.  
, Multilingual tracks are not recorded on the disc  
being played.  
, The DVD VIDEO prohibits the changing of the  
language for the soundtrack.  
, Try changing the language using the DVD  
VIDEO’s menu.  
The title of the MP3 audio album/ track or JPEG  
image folder/file is not correctly displayed.  
, The recorder can only display numbers and  
alphabet. Other characters are displayed as  
asterisks.  
The subtitle language cannot be changed or  
turned off.  
, Multilingual subtitles are not recorded on the  
DVD VIDEO.  
, The DVD VIDEO prohibits changing of the  
subtitles.  
, Try changing the subtitle using the DVD  
VIDEO’s menu.  
DVD Recording/Timer recording/  
Editing  
The channel cannot be changed from the  
channel you are recording.  
, Set the TV’s input source to “TV.”  
, The subtitles cannot be changed for the titles  
recorded on this recorder.  
Recording does not start immediately after  
z REC is pressed.  
, Operate the recorder only after “LOAD,”  
“FORMAT,” or “INF WRITE” disappears from  
the front panel display.  
The angles cannot be changed.  
, Multi-angles are not recorded on the DVD  
VIDEO being played.  
, You are trying to change the angles when “  
does not appear in the front panel display  
Nothing was recorded even though the timer  
setting is set correctly.  
, There was a power failure during recording.  
, Disconnect the AC power cord from the AC  
outlet, and connect it again.  
, The DVD VIDEO prohibits changing angles.  
, Try changing the angle using the DVD VIDEO’s  
menu.  
, The angles cannot be changed for the titles  
recorded on this recorder.  
, The program contains copy protection signals  
that restrict copying.  
The MP3 audio track cannot be played.  
, The DATA CD is not recorded in the MP3  
format that conforms to ISO9660 Level 1/  
Level 2.  
, The MP3 audio track does not have the extension  
“.MP3.”  
, The program that starts first has priority and the  
second program starts recording only after the  
first program has finished. If the programs start  
at the same time, the program listed first in the  
menu has priority (page 50).  
, There is no DVD inserted in the recorder.  
, There is not enough disc space for the recording.  
, The connected cable box/satellite receiver was  
turned off.  
, The set top box controller was incorrectly  
connected (page 12).  
, The data is not formatted in MP3 even though it  
has the extension “.MP3.”  
, The data is not MPEG1 Audio Layer 3 data.  
, The recorder cannot play audio tracks in  
MP3PRO format.  
,continued  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
, The settings in “Set Top Box Control” in  
VCR Playback  
“Features” setup have been changed (page 101).  
The playback picture does not appear on the TV  
screen.  
Recording does not stop immediately after  
x STOP is pressed.  
, It will take a few seconds for the recorder to input  
disc data before recording can stop.  
,
Make sure the TV is set to the channel for the VCR.  
If a monitor is used, set it to video input.  
The picture is not clear.  
, Adjust the tracking by the TRACKING +/–  
button.  
Timer recording is not complete or did not start  
from the beginning.  
, There was a power failure during recording.  
, The recorder’s internal clock stopped due to a  
power failure that lasted for more than 30  
minutes. Reset the clock (page 95).  
, The channel or input changed from the one you  
are recording.  
, The program that starts first has priority and the  
second program starts recording only after the  
first program has finished. If the programs start  
at the same time, the program listed first in the  
menu has priority (page 50).  
, The video heads are dirty (see page 111). Clean  
the video heads using a Sony video head cleaning  
cassette. If a Sony cleaning cassette is not  
available in your area, have the heads cleaned at  
your nearest Sony dealer (a standard service fee  
will be charged). Do not use a commercially  
available liquid type cleaning cassette, as it may  
damage the video heads.  
, The video heads may have to be replaced.  
Consult your local Sony dealer for more  
information.  
, There is not enough disc space for the recording.  
, The tape is defective.  
The c indicator flashes after timer recording is  
set.  
, Insert a recordable disc (page 30).  
, The disc does not have any space for recording.  
, The disc has 99 or more titles, which prevents  
further recording.  
The picture rolls vertically during picture  
search.  
, Adjust the vertical hold control on the TV or  
monitor.  
The picture has no sound.  
, The tape is defective.  
, The disc is protected (page 67).  
, Check the audio cord connection.  
The SYNCHRO REC indicator flashes after  
Synchro-Recording is set.  
, Insert a recordable disc (page 30).  
, Insert a disc with enough space for the recording.  
, The disc has 99 or more titles, which prevents  
further recording.  
A tape cannot be inserted.  
, Check that a tape is not already in the tape  
compartment.  
VCR Recording  
, The disc is protected (page 67).  
The channel cannot be changed from the one  
you are recording.  
Contents previously recorded were erased.  
, Data that has been recorded on a DVD with a PC  
will be erased from the disc when the disc is  
inserted.  
, Set the TV’s input source to “TV.”  
No TV program appears on the TV screen.  
,
Make sure the TV is set to the channel for the VCR.  
If a monitor is used, set it to video input.  
The tape starts playing as soon as it is  
inserted.  
, The safety tab has been removed. To record on  
this tape, cover the tab hole.  
108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The tape is ejected when z REC is pressed.  
The recording mode indication is incorrect.  
, Since the recording mode for recorded titles is  
calculated after sampling the recorded data  
during playback, it may be displayed differently  
from the mode you selected when recording.  
However, the actual recording itself is correctly  
made in the selected mode.  
, Check that the safety tab has not been removed.  
Nothing happens when z REC is pressed.  
, Make sure the tape is not at its end.  
VCR Timer recording  
The timer does not operate.  
Remote control  
, Check that the clock is correctly set.  
, Make sure a tape has been inserted.  
, Check that the safety tab has not been removed.  
, Make sure the tape is not at its end.  
, Make sure a program has been set for timer  
recording.  
The remote does not function.  
, Batteries are weak.  
, The remote is too far from the recorder.  
, The remote’s manufacturer code returned to the  
default setting when you replaced the batteries.  
Reset the code (page 21).  
, Turn on the recorder.  
, The remote is not pointed at the remote sensor on  
the recorder.  
, Make sure the timer settings are set for a future  
time.  
, Check that the cable box is turned on.  
, “- -:- -” appears in the front panel display if the  
recorder is disconnected from the wall outlet for  
more than 30 minutes. Reset the clock and timer.  
, Turn the power off and unplug the AC power  
cord.  
, Different command modes are set for the  
recorder and remote. Set the same command  
mode (page 22).  
Other Sony equipment responds to the remote.  
, The same command mode is set for both the  
Sony DVD equipment. Set a different command  
mode for the recorder (page 22).  
, The program that starts first has priority and the  
second program starts recording only after the  
first program has finished. If the programs start  
at the same time, the program listed first in the  
menu has priority (page 79).  
Others  
The c indicator flashes after timer recording is  
set.  
The recorder does not operate properly.  
, Restart the recorder. Press down "/1 on the  
recorder for more than ten seconds until “SONY  
DVD” appears in the front panel display.  
, When static electricity, etc., causes the recorder  
to operate abnormally, turn off the recorder and  
wait until the clock appears in the front panel  
display. Then, unplug the recorder and after  
leaving it off for a while, plug it in again.  
, Check that the safety tab has not been removed.  
The SYNCHRO REC indicator flashes after  
Synchro-Recording is set.  
, Check that the safety tab has not been removed.  
Display  
Menus or displays do not appear on the  
screen.  
, While the recorder is reading disc information,  
the System Menu, OPTIONS menu, or  
information display will not appear.  
The disc tray does not open after you press  
Z OPEN/CLOSE.  
, It may take a few seconds for the disc tray to  
open after you have recorded or edited a disc.  
This is because the recorder is adding disc data to  
the disc.  
“- -:- -” appears in the front panel display.  
, Set the clock again (page 95).  
The c indicator is flashing.  
, The disc does not have any space for recording.  
, Insert a recordable disc or a tape with its safety  
tab in place inside the recorder.  
,continued  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
“Cannot record because of high temperature.”  
appears on the TV screen.  
Notes About This Recorder  
, Check that the vent on the rear of the recorder is  
not blocked. Then, turn off the recorder, wait  
until the clock appears in the front panel display,  
and disconnect the AC power cord. Leave the  
recorder off for a while, then re-connect the  
power cord, and press "/1 on the recorder.  
On adjusting volume  
Do not turn up the volume while listening to a  
section with very low level inputs or no audio  
signals. If you do, the speakers may be damaged  
when a peak level section is played.  
On cleaning  
“CHILD LOCK” appears in the front panel  
Clean the cabinet, panel, and controls with a soft  
cloth slightly moistened with a mild detergent  
solution. Do not use any type of abrasive pad,  
scouring powder or solvent such as alcohol or  
benzine.  
display.  
, The recorder is locked. Cancel the Child Lock  
Control by AV mouse is not possible.  
, Some satellite receivers may not support AV  
mouse.  
On cleaning discs, disc/lens cleaners  
Do not use cleaning discs or disc/lens cleaners  
(including wet or spray types). These may  
cause the apparatus to malfunction.  
The Set Top Box Control function does not  
work.  
, Turn on the recorder.  
On replacement of parts  
In the event that this unit is repaired, repaired parts  
may be collected for reuse or recycling purposes.  
Notes about the discs  
• To keep the disc clean, handle the disc by its  
edge. Do not touch the surface. Dust,  
fingerprints, or scratches on the disc may cause  
it to malfunction.  
• Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight or heat  
sources such as hot air ducts, or leave it in a car  
parked in direct sunlight as the temperature may  
rise considerably inside the car.  
• After playing, store the disc in its case.  
• Clean the disc with a cleaning cloth. Wipe the  
disc from the center out.  
• Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner,  
commercially available disc/lens cleaners, or  
anti-static spray intended for vinyl LPs.  
• Do not use the following discs.  
110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
– A disc that has a non-standard shape (e.g.,  
card, heart).  
– A disc with a label or sticker on it.  
– A disc that has cellophane tape or sticker  
adhesive on it.  
Specifications  
System  
[DVD recorder section]  
Laser  
Semiconductor laser  
Audio recording format  
Dolby Digital  
Symptoms caused by contaminated video  
heads  
Video recording format  
MPEG Video  
initial  
contamination  
terminal  
[VCR section]  
Format  
When the video heads are dirty, the picture is  
distorted or the tape cannot be played.  
VHS NTSC standard  
Video recording system  
Rotary head helical scanning FM system  
Video heads  
Double azimuth four heads  
Video signal  
Clean the video heads using a Sony video head  
cleaning cassette. If a Sony cleaning cassette is not  
available in your area, have the heads cleaned at  
your nearest Sony dealer (a standard service fee  
will be charged). Do not use a commercially  
available liquid type cleaning cassette, as it may  
damage the video heads.  
NTSC color, EIA standards  
Tape speed  
3
SP: 33.35 mm/s (1 /8 inches/s)  
7
EP: 11.12 mm/s ( /16 inches/s)  
11  
LP: 16.67 mm/s ( /16 inches/s),  
playback only  
Maximum recording/playback time  
8 hrs. in EP mode (with T-160 tape)  
Rewind time  
Approx. 2 min (with T-120 tape)  
[Timer section]  
Clock  
Quartz locked  
Timer indication  
12-hour cycle  
Timer setting  
12 programs in total (max.)  
,continued  
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Inputs and outputs  
General  
Power requirements  
120 V AC, 60 Hz  
Power consumption  
31 W  
LINE 1 IN and LINE 2 IN  
VIDEO IN, phono jack (1 each)  
Input signal: 1 Vp-p, 75 ohms, unbalanced,  
sync negative  
Power back-up  
AUDIO IN, phono jacks (2 each)  
Input level: 327 mVrms  
Input impedance: more than 47 kilohms  
LINE 2 IN  
Back-up duration: 30 min  
Operating temperature  
5°C to 35°C (41°F to 95°F)  
Storage temperature  
–20°C to 60°C (–4°F to 140°F)  
Operating humidity  
25% to 80%  
Dimensions including projecting parts  
and controls (w/h/d)  
Approx. 430 × 82 × 332 mm  
S VIDEO, 4-pin, mini-DIN jack  
Y: 1.0 Vp-p, unbalanced, sync negative  
C: 0.286 Vp-p, load impedance 75 ohms  
DV IN, 4-pin jack, i.LINK S100  
LINE OUT  
VIDEO OUT, phono jack (1)  
Output signal: 1 Vp-p, 75 ohms,  
unbalanced, sync negative  
AUDIO OUT, phono jacks (2)  
Standard output: 327 mVrms  
Load impedance: 47 kilohms  
Output impedance: less than 10 kilohms  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT  
1
1
(Approx. 17 × 3 /4 × 13 /8 inches)  
Mass  
Approx. 4.7 kg (Approx. 10.4 lbs)  
Supplied accessories  
Remote commander (remote) (1)  
Size AA (R6) batteries (2)  
Audio/video cord (1)  
OPTICAL, Optical output jack  
–18 dBm (wave length: 660 nm)  
COAXIAL, phono jack  
Set top box controller (1)  
Design and specifications are subject to change  
without notice.  
Output signal: 0.5 Vp-p, 75 ohms  
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT (Y, PB, PR)  
Phono jack  
Y: 1.0 Vp-p/PB, PR: 0.7 Vp-p, 75 ohms  
S VIDEO OUT  
4-pin, mini-DIN jack  
Y: 1.0 Vp-p, unbalanced, sync negative  
C: 0.286 Vp-p, load impedance 75 ohms  
SET TOP BOX CONTROL  
Mini jack  
HDMI  
HDMI 19 pin-Standard Connector  
112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
i.LINK baud rate  
i.LINK’s maximum baud rate varies according to  
the equipment. Three maximum baud rates are  
defined:  
S100 (approx. 100 Mbps*)  
S200 (approx. 200 Mbps)  
About i.LINK  
The DV IN jack on this recorder is an i.LINK-  
compliant DV IN jack. This section describes the  
i.LINK standard and its features.  
S400 (approx. 400 Mbps)  
What is i.LINK?  
i.LINK is a digital serial interface for handling  
digital video, digital audio and other data in two  
directions between equipment having the i.LINK  
jack, and for controlling other equipment.  
i.LINK-compatible pieces of equipment can be  
connected by a single i.LINK cable. Possible  
applications are operations and data transactions  
with various digital AV equipment. When two or  
more i.LINK-compatible equipment are  
connected to this recorder in a daisy chain,  
operations and data transactions are possible with  
not only the equipment that this recorder is  
connected to but also with other devices via the  
directly connected equipment.  
Note, however, that the method of operation  
sometimes varies according to the characteristics  
and specifications of the equipment to be  
connected, and that operations and data  
transactions are sometimes not possible on some  
connected equipment.  
The baud rate is listed under “Specifications” in  
the instruction manual of each equipment. It is  
also indicated near the i.LINK jack on some  
equipment.  
The maximum baud rate of equipment on which it  
is not indicated such as this unit is “S100.”  
When units are connected to equipment having a  
different maximum baud rate, the baud rate  
sometimes differs from the indicated baud rate.  
* What is Mbps?  
Mbps stands for megabits per second, or the amount of  
data that can be sent or received in one second. For  
example, a baud rate of 100 Mbps means that 100  
megabits of data can be sent in one second.  
i.LINK functions on this recorder  
For details on how to dub when this recorder is  
connected to other video equipment having DV  
jacks, see page 90.  
The DV jack on this recorder can only input DVC-  
SD signals. It cannot output signals. The DV jack  
will not accept MICROMV signals from  
equipment such as a MICROMV digital video  
camera with an i.LINK jack.  
For further precautions, see the notes on page 90.  
For details on precautions when connecting this  
recorder, also see the instruction manuals for the  
equipment to be connected.  
Note  
Normally, only one piece of equipment can be connected  
to this recorder by the i.LINK cable (DV connecting  
cable). When connecting this recorder to i.LINK-  
compatible equipment having two or more i.LINK jacks  
(DV jacks), see the instruction manual of the equipment  
to be connected.  
About the name “i.LINK”  
i.LINK is a more familiar term for IEEE 1394 data  
transport bus proposed by SONY, and is a  
trademark approved by many corporations.  
IEEE 1394 is an international standard  
standardized by the Institute of Electrical and  
Electronics Engineers.  
Required i.LINK cable  
Use the Sony i.LINK 4-pin-to-4-pin cable (during  
DV/D8 dubbing).  
i.LINK and are trademarks.  
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Guide to Parts and Controls  
For more information, see the pages in parentheses.  
Front panel  
Buttons on the recorder have the same function as the buttons on the remote if they have the same or  
similar names.  
Open the  
cover  
A A (open/close) button (35, 47, 91)  
B "/1 (on/standby) switch (23)  
C Disc tray (35, 47, 91)  
J SELECT DVD/VIDEO buttons (35, 47, 69,  
76)  
K
(remote sensor) (20)  
L Front panel display (45, 73)  
M HDMI indicator (16)  
D DVD t button (85)  
T VIDEO button (84)  
E Tape compartment (69, 76)  
F A (eject) button (69)  
N SYNCHRO REC indicator (51, 80)  
1 2  
O CHANNEL/TRACKING +/– buttons* *  
G z REC (record) button (47, 76)  
P ONE-TOUCH DUBBING button (93)  
H m/M (rewind/fast-forward) buttons  
(37)  
Q DV IN jack (90)  
I H (play) button (35, 69)  
X (pause) button (36, 47, 71, 76)  
x (stop) button (35, 47, 69, 76)  
R LINE 2 IN (S VIDEO/VIDEO/AUDIO L  
(MONO)/R) jacks (27)  
*1  
The CHANNEL/TRACKING + button has a tactile  
dot. Use the tactile dot as a reference.  
The CHANNEL +/– buttons are used for channel  
*2  
selection when the set top box control is turned on  
114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Remote  
For DVD functions  
I . PREV (previous)/> NEXT  
buttons (36)  
J
REPLAY/  
ADVANCE buttons  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
K m  
/
M (search) buttons (36)  
L CLEAR button (103)  
M X PAUSE button (47)  
N z REC (record) button (47)  
O ?/1 (on/standby) switch (23)  
1 2  
P CH (channel) +/– button* * (12, 47)  
Q INPUT button (47, 54, 91)  
R TIME/TEXT button (45)  
1
S AUDIO button* (36)  
SUBTITLE button (36)  
T SYSTEM MENU button (10)  
TITLE LIST button (39, 57)  
TIMER button (49)  
U ORIGINAL/PLAYLIST button (39, 57)  
V OPTIONS button (40)  
1
W H PLAY button* (35)  
X x STOP button (35, 47)  
Y REC MODE button (47, 91)  
Z SYNCHRO REC button (51)  
wj TV buttons  
?/1 (on/standby) switch (21)  
• INPUT button (21)  
1
A Z OPEN/CLOSE button (35, 47, 91)  
• CH (channel) +/– button* (21)  
• VOL (volume) +/– button (21)  
• DIGITAL/ANALOG button (21)  
1
C Number buttons* (21, 36)  
*1  
SET button (102)  
Number 5, AUDIO, CH +, and H PLAY buttons  
have a tactile dot. Use the tactile dot as a reference.  
D ANGLE button (36)  
*2  
The CH +/– button are used for channel selection  
when the set top box control is turned on (page 12).  
E TOP MENU button (35)  
MENU button (35)  
F DISPLAY button (44)  
G M/m/</,/ENTER button (23)  
H O RETURN button (23)  
,continued  
115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
For VCR functions  
A Z OPEN/CLOSE (eject) button (69)  
1
B Number buttons* (21)  
SET button (102)  
C SYSTEM MENU button (10)  
D DISPLAY button (73)  
E O RETURN button (23)  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
F . PREV (previous)/> NEXT  
buttons (71)  
G
(search) buttons (71)  
H CLEAR button (69)  
I X PAUSE button (71, 76)  
J z REC (record) button (76)  
K ?/1 (on/standby) switch (23)  
L VIDEO button (69, 76)  
1 2  
M CH (channel)/TRACKING +/– button* *  
N INPUT button (76)  
O TIME/TEXT button (73)  
1
P AUDIO button* (74)  
Q TIMER button (78)  
R M/m/</,/ENTER button (23)  
S OPTIONS button (72)  
T
REPLAY/  
ADVANCE buttons  
(71)  
1
U H PLAY button* (69)  
V x STOP button (69, 76)  
W REC MODE button (76)  
X SYNCHRO REC button (80)  
Y TV buttons  
?/1 (on/standby) switch (21)  
• INPUT button (21)  
1
• CH (channel) +/– button* (21)  
• VOL (volume) +/– button (21)  
• DIGITAL/ANALOG button (21)  
*1  
Number 5, AUDIO, CH +, and H PLAY buttons  
have a tactile dot. Use the tactile dot as a reference.  
*2  
The CH +/– button are used for channel selection  
when the set top box control is turned on (page 12).  
116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Front panel display  
VR  
RW  
VCD  
STEREO  
DVD  
VIDEO  
A DVD playing/recording status  
B Disc type/recording format  
C Audio signal indicators  
D STEREO indicator (74)  
E VIDEO playing/recording status  
F Tape indicator  
H Displays the following (45, 73):  
• Playing time/remaining time  
• Current title/chapter/track/index number  
• Recording time/recording mode  
• Clock  
• Channel  
I
(angle) indicator (36)  
J Disc indicator  
G Timer indicator  
Rear panel  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO OUT  
AUDIO OUT  
S
VIDEO OUT LINE  
1
IN LINE OUT  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
Y
L
R
P
P
B
R
SETTOP  
BOX  
HDMI OUT  
CONTROL  
R
OPTICAL COAXIAL  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT  
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
A AUDIO OUT L/R jacks (18)  
B SET TOP BOX CONTROL jack (13)  
C HDMI OUT jack (16)  
F S VIDEO OUT jack (15)  
G LINE 1 IN (VIDEO/AUDIO L/R) jacks  
H LINE OUT (VIDEO/AUDIO L/R) jacks  
D DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (COAXIAL/  
(15, 17)  
OPTICAL) jacks (18)  
E COMPONENT VIDEO OUT (Y, PB, PR)  
117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Glossary  
A DVD-RW is a recordable and rewritable disc  
that is the same size as a DVD VIDEO. The DVD-  
RW has two different modes: VR mode and Video  
mode. DVDs created in Video mode have the  
same format as a DVD VIDEO, while discs  
created in VR (Video Recording) mode allow the  
contents to be programmed or edited.  
Sections of a picture or a music feature that are  
smaller than titles. A title is composed of several  
chapters. Depending on the disc, no chapters may  
be recorded.  
Copy protection signals (page 47)  
A DVD+R (read “plus R”) is a recordable disc that  
is the same size as a DVD VIDEO. Contents can  
be recorded only once to a DVD+R, and will have  
the same format as a DVD VIDEO.  
Copy restriction set by copyright owners, etc.  
These signals are included in some software or TV  
programs and restrict recording on this recorder.  
Dolby Digital (page 98)  
Digital audio compression technology developed  
by Dolby Laboratories. This technology conforms  
to multi-channel surround sound. The rear channel  
is stereo and there is a discrete subwoofer channel  
in this format. Dolby Digital provides the same  
discrete channels of high quality digital audio  
found in “Dolby Digital” theater surround sound  
systems. Good channel separation is realized  
because all of the channel data is recorded  
discretely, and little deterioration occurs because  
all channel data processing is digital.  
A DVD-R is a recordable disc that is the same size  
as a DVD VIDEO. Contents can be recorded only  
once to a DVD-R. The DVD-R has two different  
modes: VR mode and Video mode. DVDs created  
in Video mode have the same format as a DVD  
VIDEO, while discs created in VR (Video  
Recording) mode allow the contents to be  
programmed or edited.  
DVD VIDEO (page 33)  
A disc that contains up to eight hours of moving  
pictures on a disc the same diameter as a CD.  
The data capacity of a single-layer and single-  
sided DVD is 4.7 GB (Giga Byte), which is 7  
times that of a CD. The data capacity of a double-  
layer and single-sided DVD is 8.5 GB, a single-  
layer and double-sided DVD is 9.4 GB, and  
double-layer and double-sided DVD is 17 GB.  
The picture data uses the MPEG 2 format, which  
is a worldwide standard of digital compression  
technology. The picture data is compressed to  
about 1/40 (average) of its original size. The DVD  
also uses a variable rate coding technology that  
changes the data to be allocated according to the  
status of the picture. Audio information is  
recorded in a multi-channel format, such as Dolby  
Digital, allowing you to enjoy a more real audio  
presence.  
Digital audio compression technology by Digital  
Theater Systems, Inc. This technology conforms  
to multi-channel surround sound. The rear channel  
is stereo and there is a discrete subwoofer channel  
in this format. DTS provides the same discrete  
channels of high quality digital audio.  
Good channel separation is realized because all of  
the channel data is recorded discretely, and little  
deterioration occurs because all channel data  
processing is digital.  
A DVD+RW (read “plus RW”) is a recordable and  
rewritable disc. DVD+RWs use a recording  
format that is comparable to the DVD VIDEO  
format.  
Furthermore, various advanced functions such as  
the multi-angle, multilingual, and Parental  
Control functions are provided on the DVD.  
118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface)  
Sections of a music feature on a CD (the length of  
a song).  
HDMI is an interface that supports both video and  
audio on a single digital connection. The HDMI  
connection carries standard to high definition  
video signals and multi-channel audio signals to  
AV components such as HDMI equipped TVs, in  
digital form without degradation.  
The HDMI specification supports HDCP (High-  
bandwidth Digital Contents Protection), a copy  
protection technology that incorporates coding  
technology for digital video signals.  
Interlace format  
Interlace format shows every other line of an  
image as a single “field” and is the standard  
method for displaying images on television. The  
even number field shows the even numbered lines  
of an image, and the odd numbered field shows the  
odd numbered lines of an image.  
Original (page 56)  
Titles actually recorded on a DVD-RW (VR  
mode) or DVD-R (VR mode). Erasing original  
titles frees up disc space on DVD-RWs.  
Playback information created from the actual  
recordings on a DVD-RW (VR mode) or DVD-R  
(VR mode). A Playlist leaves the original titles as  
they are, and contains only the information needed  
to control playback. A Playlist title takes up very  
little disc space.  
Progressive format (page 97)  
Compared to the Interlace format that alternately  
shows every other line of an image (field) to create  
one frame, the Progressive format shows the entire  
image at once as a single frame. This means that  
while the Interlace format can show 30 frames/60  
fields in one second, the Progressive format can  
show 60 frames in one second. The overall picture  
quality increases and still images, text, and  
horizontal lines appear sharper.  
The longest section of a picture or music feature  
on a DVD, movie, etc., in video software, or the  
entire album in audio software.  
119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Abbreviation  
TUR  
Language  
Turkish  
DVD Audio/Subtitle  
Language  
VIE  
Vietnamese  
Afrikaans  
ZAF  
When you play a DVD VIDEO, the language of  
the selected audio track or subtitle is abbreviated  
as follows. See page 102 to change the audio track  
or subtitle.  
Abbreviation  
ARA  
BUL  
CHI  
Language  
Arabic  
Bulgarian  
Chinese  
Croatian  
Czech  
CRO  
CZE  
DAN  
DEU  
ENG  
ESP  
Danish  
German  
English  
Spanish  
Finish  
FIN  
FRA  
GRE  
HUN  
IDN  
French  
Greek  
Hungarian  
Indonesian  
Hindi  
IND  
ISL  
Icelandic  
Italian  
ITA  
IWR  
JPN  
Hebrew  
Japanese  
Korean  
Malay  
KOR  
MAL  
NLD  
NOR  
POL  
Dutch  
Norwegian  
Polish  
POR  
RUS  
SVE  
Portuguese  
Russian  
Swedish  
Thai  
THA  
120  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Cable box brand  
Betavue  
Code number  
0022  
Cable Box/Satellite  
Receiver Brand Code  
British Telecom  
BVS  
0003  
0641  
When you want to use the set top box control  
function, find the brand code number of your cable  
box/satellite receiver from the list and enter it in  
step 7 of Easy Setup (page 23).  
If more than one code number is listed, try  
entering them one at a time until you find the one  
that works with your cable box/satellite receiver.  
Cable Healthcare  
Cable Star  
Cabletenna  
Cableview  
Century  
0769, 0058  
0056  
0022, 0039  
0022  
0153, 0618, 0008, 0315  
0017  
Citation  
Cable box brand  
Code number  
Citizen  
0153, 0315, 0078, 0242  
0883  
3M  
0033  
Clearmaster  
ClearMax  
ABC  
0003, 0007, 0011, 0017,  
0008, 0014, 0001, 0013,  
0206, 0047, 0237, 0033  
0883, 1247  
0031, 0025  
0233, 0232  
0274  
Colour Voice  
Comband  
Accuphase  
0003, 0007, 0013, 0047,  
0001, 0011, 0017, 0014,  
0206  
Comtec  
Comtronics  
Comtronics Eagle  
Contec  
0060, 0040  
0040, 0060  
0019  
Acorn  
1102, 0237  
0237  
Action  
Active  
0237, 1102  
0015  
Coolmax  
0883  
Aim  
Curtis Mathes  
Dae Ryung Eagle  
Daeryung  
0015, 0242  
0008  
Allegro  
Amark  
0315, 0153  
0008, 0277, 0144, 0056  
0060  
0008, 0877, 0477, 0277,  
1877  
American  
Americast  
Antronix  
Anvision  
Apache  
Arbatron  
Archer  
0899  
Diamond  
Digeo  
0035  
0207, 0022  
0211, 0111  
0770  
1476  
Digi  
0637  
Director  
Dumont  
Eagle Comtronics  
Eastern  
0476  
0014, 0011, 0003, 0476  
0637  
0153, 0022, 0207, 0039,  
0797, 0237, 0260  
0060, 0028  
0002, 0274, 0418  
0078  
ASE  
1080  
Electricord  
Emerson  
Everquest  
Focus  
Auna  
1269  
0797, 0303, 0015, 0014  
0040, 0015  
0400  
BBT  
0267  
BCC  
0276  
Belcor  
0056, 0022  
0014  
Fosgate  
0276  
Bell & Howell  
Bell Atlantic  
Bell South  
Bestlink  
Fujitsu  
0246  
0641  
Funai  
0248, 0019  
0649  
0899  
FutureVision  
0303  
,continued  
121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Cable box brand  
Garrard  
Code number  
0153  
Cable box brand  
Maestro  
Code number  
0812  
Gateway  
0764  
Magnavox  
0797, 0027, 0032, 0334,  
0069  
GC Electronics  
0207, 0056, 0330, 0016,  
0040, 0077, 0030  
Millennium  
Memorex  
Mitsubishi  
Motorola  
0618, 0153  
0000  
GE  
0232, 0233, 0144, 0021  
Gemini  
0015, 0070, 0057, 0242,  
0014, 0797, 0013, 0400  
0003  
0476, 0276, 1476, 0810,  
1376, 1254, 0400, 1106  
General Instrument  
0476, 0011, 0014, 0098,  
0810, 0024, 0003, 0015,  
0276  
Movie Time  
MS  
0156, 0078, 0063, 0203  
0069, 0015, 1018, 0303  
GHZ  
0078  
MultiVision  
Myrio  
0012  
Gibraltar  
Global  
0003  
1117  
1327  
NET  
0274  
GMI  
0069, 0057, 0015, 0797  
0144, 0040  
0770, 0797  
1136  
Next Level  
Nexus  
0764, 1316, 1315, 1314  
0770  
GoldStar  
Goodmind  
Gradiente  
Hamlin  
Northcoast  
Nova Vision  
Novabeam  
Novaplex  
NSC  
0671, 0314  
0277, 0008  
0277  
0020, 0009, 0034, 0259,  
0015, 0273, 0206  
Healthway Interactive  
Hitachi  
0058, 1020, 1015, 0769  
0618, 0277, 0017, 0008  
0011, 0154, 0009, 0008,  
0003, 0033, 0014, 0255  
0156, 0070, 0203, 0063,  
0400, 0012, 0618, 0022,  
0637, 0010, 0044  
Houston Tracker  
Hwalin  
0011  
Oak  
0007, 0019, 0303, 0248,  
0017  
0303  
Hytek  
0007  
Omega  
0015  
0371  
0021  
0237  
0843  
IBM  
0670  
Omniview  
Optimus  
Pace  
IEEC  
1018  
Interbuy  
IPC Guest Services  
Jasco  
0274  
0893  
Pacific Bell  
Panasonic  
0315, 0153, 0015  
0014, 0400  
0107, 0021, 0144, 0008,  
0124, 0307, 0000, 0040  
Jebsee  
Jerrold  
0003, 0014, 0276, 0011,  
0012, 0020, 0024, 0015,  
0047, 0098, 0476, 0031,  
0029, 0111, 0032, 0054,  
0810, 0028  
Panther  
Paragon  
Penney  
Philips  
0637  
0000, 0525, 0008  
0637, 0000  
0025, 0031, 0290, 0027,  
0030, 0153, 0060, 0242,  
0028, 0334, 0211, 0029,  
0259, 0307, 0652, 0013,  
0069, 0649, 0255, 0305,  
0032, 0111, 0317  
Kuang Yu  
Leon  
0024  
0069, 0015  
0040, 0144  
0440  
LG  
Linsay  
Macom  
Pioneer  
0144, 0023, 0533, 1877,  
0877, 0260  
0033  
122  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cable box brand  
Popular Mechanics  
Prelude  
Code number  
0400  
Cable box brand  
Sony  
Code number  
1006  
0770  
Spectradyne  
Spectravision  
Sprucer  
0769, 0058  
Prism  
0012, 0013, 0059  
0786  
0058  
Protelcon  
Pulsar  
0021, 0307, 0010, 0144  
0203, 0096, 0155  
0000, 0040  
0000  
Standard Components  
Starcom  
Quasar  
0003, 0015, 0047, 0014,  
0098, 0305  
Quest  
0144, 0020  
0040  
Stargate  
0015, 0040, 0770, 0865,  
0797, 0305, 0014  
R Line  
RadioShack  
0883, 0015, 0315, 0303,  
0797  
Starquest  
StarSight  
Stealth  
0015  
0542, 0422  
0274  
Rampage  
Ranger  
RCA  
0255  
1247  
Stellar One  
Storm  
0807  
0021, 0060, 0797, 0047,  
1256, 0843  
1018, 0637  
1230  
Realistic  
Recoton  
Regal  
0207, 0153  
0153, 0400  
Suena Madritel  
Supercable  
Supermax  
Sylvania  
Tandy  
0276  
0259, 0020, 0273, 0279,  
0276  
0883  
0001  
Regency  
0002, 0020, 0682  
0258  
Rembrandt  
0070, 0153, 0040, 0022,  
0011  
Tatung  
0097  
Teac  
1018  
RK  
0304, 0306, 0479  
0000  
Technics  
Teknika  
Teleavia  
TeleCaption  
Teleview  
Texscan  
TFC  
0029  
Runco  
Samsung  
0146  
0040, 0144, 0023, 0003,  
0070, 0000  
0040  
Sasktel  
1737  
0221  
Scientific Atlanta  
0008, 0277, 0017, 0006,  
0237, 0025, 0477, 0207,  
0877, 0003, 0012, 0000,  
0021, 1877  
0063, 0040  
0001, 0096, 0010  
0310  
Seam  
0510  
Thomson  
Timeless  
Tocom  
1256  
Sears  
0510  
0418, 0274, 0040  
Sejin  
1265  
0012, 0013, 0029, 0019,  
0059, 0017  
Siemens  
Sigma  
0246  
Torx  
0003  
0019  
Toshiba  
Trans PX  
Trinity  
Tristar  
TS  
0000  
Signal  
0040, 0015, 0011, 0035  
0303, 0276, 0153, 0315  
Signature  
SkyCable  
Skygiant  
SL Marx  
0011  
0112  
1091  
0040  
1248  
0883  
0255, 0024, 1018, 0003,  
0303  
,continued  
123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cable box brand  
Tusa  
Code number  
0015  
Satellite receiver  
brand  
Code number  
AlphaStar  
0772  
1333  
0775  
0856  
0216  
1109  
TV COMM  
TV Guide  
TV86  
0035, 0019  
1476  
Atlantic Telephone  
Bell ExpressVu  
Century  
0063, 0040  
0022, 0225  
0207, 0153, 0022  
0007  
Uniden  
Chaparral  
Unika  
Crossdigital  
DirecTV  
United Artists  
United Cable  
Universal  
0749, 0566, 0392, 1749,  
0099, 1109, 1076, 1442,  
1856, 0247, 1142, 1639,  
0724, 0639, 0819  
0003, 0014, 0011, 0276  
0191, 0078, 0207, 0056,  
0022, 0039, 0153, 0077,  
0322, 0315  
Dish Network System  
Dishpro  
0775, 1005, 1170  
0775, 1005  
0775, 1170, 1005  
0775  
US Electronics  
V2  
0276, 0008, 0003, 0017  
0883  
Echostar  
Verizon  
0246  
Expressvu  
Galaxis  
Videoway  
VideoWorks  
Vidtech  
0250, 0000  
0124  
0863  
GE  
0566  
0244  
General Instrument  
GOI  
0361, 0869, 0627  
0775  
Viewmaster  
Viewstar  
0883, 0770  
0258, 0289, 0060, 0063,  
0211, 0027, 0111, 0030,  
0121  
Gradiente  
Hitachi  
0856  
0819, 0749  
0775  
Vision  
0883  
1264  
0883  
0565  
0078  
Houston Tracker  
HTS  
Visionetics  
Vortex View  
WaveMaster  
Wiso  
0775  
Hughes Network Systems 0749, 1749, 1442, 1142  
Humax  
1176, 1359, 1048, 0863,  
0283  
Innova  
0099  
Zenith  
0000, 0525, 0054, 0017,  
0039, 0153, 0060, 0315,  
0191, 0899  
Jerrold  
0361, 0036, 0627  
0775, 1170  
0722, 0724  
0869  
JVC  
Zentek  
0400  
Magnavox  
McIntosh  
Memorex  
Mitsubishi  
Motorola  
NEC  
0724  
0749  
0869  
1270, 0496, 0499, 0507,  
0508  
Netsat  
0099  
Next Level  
Optimus  
Panasonic  
0869  
0724  
0247, 0701  
124  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Satellite receiver  
brand  
Code number  
Paysat  
Philips  
0724  
1076, 0099, 1142, 0724,  
0722, 0749, 1442, 1749,  
0856, 0775  
Primestar  
Proscan  
QNS  
0361, 0627, 0869  
0392, 0566  
1367  
RadioShack  
RCA  
0869  
0566, 0392, 0143, 0855  
1109, 1276  
0856, 0099, 1856  
0639, 1639  
0869  
Samsung  
Sky  
Sony  
Star Choice  
Star Trak  
Thomson  
Tivo  
0869, 0772  
0566, 0392  
1142, 1442  
0790, 0749, 1749, 1285  
1333, 1358  
0724, 0722  
0361  
Toshiba  
UEC  
Uniden  
Video Cipher II Plus  
Zenith  
0856, 1856  
125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT  
Connecting  
DVD+R 30, 118  
DVD+R DL 30  
DVD+RW 30, 118  
DVD-R 30, 118  
DVD-RAM 33  
Index  
the cable box/satellite  
receiver 12  
to your AV/amplifier  
(receiver) 18  
Words in quotations appear in  
the on-screen displays.  
DVD-RW 30, 118  
Numerics  
to your TV 15  
E
16:9 25, 96  
“Connections” 101  
Controlling TVs with the  
remote 21  
Easy Setup 104  
“Edit” 53, 82  
4:3 Letter Box 25, 96  
4:3 Pan Scan 25, 96  
“Edit Playlist” 63  
“Edit Scene” 63  
Enter characters 60  
EP mode 76  
“Copy” 66  
A
Copy protection 47, 118  
“A-B Erase” 58  
“Add” 64, 65  
ADVANCE 36, 71  
ANGLE 36  
Copy-Free 47  
Copy-Never 47  
Copy-Once 47  
Counter 69  
“Erase” 53, 58, 82  
“Erase All Titles” 67  
AUDIO 36, 74  
CPRM 30  
F
“Audio” 102  
“Create Dubbing List” 87  
“Create Playlist” 62  
Creating chapters 49  
“Factory Setting” 104  
Fast forward 37, 71  
Fast reverse 37, 71  
Feature settings 100  
Finalizing 88  
“Audio (HDMI)” 99  
Audio cords 18  
“Audio DRC” 99  
Audio settings 98  
“Auto Play” 101  
“Auto Repeat” 101  
D
“Digital Out” 98  
“Format DVD-RW” 101  
Formatting 47, 67  
“Front Display” 103  
Front panel 114  
“Disc Finalize” 67, 89  
“Disc Format” 67  
“Disc Information” 67  
“Disc Menu” 102  
“Disc Name” 67  
“Disc Protect” 67  
“Disc Setting” 67, 89  
Disc types 30  
B
Batteries 20  
“Black Level” 97  
“Brand Code” 101  
Front panel display 117  
H
Handling discs 110  
HDMI 16, 119  
“HDMI Resolution” 96  
C
Cable box 13  
Display  
Cable box brand 121  
Cable box brand code 121  
“Ch. Digit lock” 101  
Changing or canceling timer  
settings (Timer List) 53, 81  
Chapter 118  
“Chapter Erase” 58  
“Check” 63  
Child Lock 38  
front panel display 117  
Setup Display 94  
“Divide Title” 59, 63  
Dolby Digital 25, 98, 118  
“Downmix” 99  
DTS 25, 37, 98, 118  
“Dubbing” 84, 86  
“DV/D8 Audio Input” 92,  
I
i.LINK 90, 113  
INPUT 48, 76, 91  
Interlace format 119  
J
JPEG image files 42  
Cleaning discs 110  
Cleaning the video heads 111  
CLEAR 69  
Clock Set settings 95  
“Combine Titles” 64  
“Command Mode” 22, 104  
“DV/D8 Dubbing” 92  
“DV/D8 One Touch  
Dubbing” 93  
“DV/D8 Simple Dubbing” 92  
“DVD Auto Chapter” 100  
DVD Editing 56  
L
“Language” 102  
Language abbreviation 120  
LINE 1 IN 13  
LINE 2 IN 27  
DVD VIDEO 33, 118  
126  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
“Line Audio Input” 51, 55,  
“Progressive” 97  
Progressive format 119  
“Protect” 58  
“Subtitle” 102  
“Surround” 99  
SYNCHRO REC 52, 80  
“Synchro Recording” 52, 80,  
M
MENU 35  
Menu  
Top menu 35  
“Mode for SET button” 102  
“Modify” 64  
“Move” 65  
Q
System Menu 10  
Quick Timer 48, 76  
T
R
“Tape Length” 101  
Tape speed 75  
Rear panel 117  
REC 48, 76  
MP3 audio tracks 41  
TIME/TEXT 45, 73  
REC MODE 48, 76  
Recording 46, 75  
recordable discs 30  
recording format 30  
recording mode 46  
tape speed 75  
TIMER 50, 78  
Timer List 53, 81  
Timer recording 49, 78  
change or cancel 53, 81  
Title 119  
N
NEXT 36, 71  
Number buttons 21, 40  
“Title Dubbing” 87  
“Title Erase” 58, 63  
TITLE LIST 39, 57  
Title List 39  
“Title Name” 58, 63  
TOP MENU 35  
Track 119  
TRACKING 70  
Tracking adjustment 70  
Troubleshooting 105  
“TV Type” 96  
Recording mode 46, 75  
Recording time 46, 49  
Region code 34  
Remaining time 44, 77  
Remote 20, 115  
REPLAY 36, 71  
Resetting 104  
O
One Touch Dubbing 93  
On-screen display  
OPTIONS menu 11  
Setup Display 94  
Sub-menu 11  
System Menu 10  
OPTIONS 11  
Options settings 102  
Original 39, 119  
ORIGINAL/PLAYLIST 39,  
Resume Play 38  
Rotate 42  
S
Safety tab 75  
U
“OSD” language 24, 102  
Satellite receiver 13  
Satellite receiver brand code  
“Scan Audio” 38, 99  
“Scene Dubbing” 87  
Searching  
for “Chapter” 40  
for “Title” 40  
for “Track” 40  
Time Search 40  
Set top box control 12, 24,  
“Unfinalize” 89  
Unrecordable pictures 47  
P
“Parental” 103  
V
Parental Control 38  
Parts and controls 114  
PAUSE 37, 48, 71, 76  
PBC 38  
“Picture Control” 97  
PLAY 35, 69  
“VCR Function” 101  
“Video (HDMI)” 96  
VIDEO CD 33  
Video mode 30  
Video settings 96  
VR mode 30  
Playable discs 33  
Playback 35, 69  
JPEG image files 42  
MP3 audio tracks 41  
Resume Play 38  
Slow-motion play 37, 71  
Playlist 39, 61, 119  
Power cord 20  
Set top box controller 12, 26  
Z
Settings 94  
Zoom 42  
Setup Display 94  
“Simple Dubbing” 86  
Slide show 42, 43  
SP mode 76  
STOP 35, 48, 69, 76  
PREV 36, 71  
Sub-menu 11  
Program Dubbing 86  
SUBTITLE 36  
127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Índice  
Este manual muestra la configuración básica y el funcionamiento de la videograbadora-grabadora de  
DVD.  
Para obtener más información, consulte el manual de instrucciones en inglés.  
Funcionamiento básico  
Grabación de la videograbadora desde un equipo conectado que no tiene  
ES  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No es posible grabar en esta grabadora si tiene:  
– un decodificador de cable o un receptor vía  
satélite sin salidas de audio/video.  
Conexiones y ajustes  
– cable sin decodificador de cable.  
– sólo antena (sin cable de televisión).  
En los casos mencionados anteriormente, póngase  
en contacto con la empresa suministradora para  
consultar si podrían proporcionarle un  
decodificador de cable o un receptor vía satélite  
compatible.  
Conexión de la grabadora  
Siga los pasos del 1 al 6 para conectar y realizar  
los ajustes de la grabadora.  
Notas  
• Enchufe los cables firmemente para prevenir  
perturbaciones no deseadas.  
• Consulte las instrucciones suministradas con los  
componentes que va a conectar.  
• No es posible conectar la grabadora a un televisor que  
no disponga de toma de entrada de video.  
• Asegúrese de desconectar el cable de alimentación de  
cada componente antes de realizar las conexiones. No  
conecte el cable de alimentación hasta haber llegado al  
Utilización de la función de control  
del decodificador de cable/receptor  
vía satélite  
Esta función permite que la grabadora controle el  
decodificador de cable o el receptor vía satélite  
mediante el controlador del decodificador  
suministrado. También es posible utilizar el  
mando a distancia de la grabadora para cambiar  
canales en el decodificador de cable/receptor vía  
satélite, siempre que ambos estén encendidos.  
Para utilizar la función de control del  
decodificador de cable/receptor vía satélite, es  
necesario:  
Paso 1: Desembalaje  
– comprobar el código de marca del decodificador  
de cable/receptor vía satélite. Consulte “Cable  
Box/Satellite Receiver Brand Code” en el  
manual de instrucciones en inglés (página 121).  
– conectar el controlador del decodificador  
– ajustar el número del código de marca y la  
entrada de la grabadora que está conectada al  
decodificador de cable/receptor vía satélite  
Compruebe que dispone de los siguientes  
elementos:  
• Cable de audio/video  
(clavija fono × 3 y clavija fono × 3) (1)  
• Mando a distancia (1)  
• Controlador del decodificador (1)  
• Pilas de tamaño AA (R6) (2)  
Paso 2: Conexión del  
decodificador de cable/  
receptor vía satélite  
(sintonizador)  
Una vez configurado el control del decodificador  
de cable/receptor vía satélite, compruebe que la  
grabadora controla correctamente el dispositivo  
en cuestión (página 11).  
Esta grabadora no incluye un sintonizador de  
televisión.  
Para grabar programas de televisión con este  
dispositivo, es necesario conectarlo a un  
sintonizador que tenga tomas de salida de audio/  
video.  
ES  
Si ha estado utilizando la videograbadora  
conectada a una antena, conecte esta grabadora a  
la videograbadora mediante un cable de audio/  
video. De este modo, podrá grabar programas de  
televisión.  
ES  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Conexión del decodificador de cable/receptor vía satélite y del controlador  
del decodificador  
Conecte las tomas LINE IN mediante un cable de audio/video.  
Con esta conexión, puede grabar cualquier canal del decodificador de cable o receptor vía satélite.  
Asegúrese de que el receptor vía satélite o decodificador de cable está encendido.  
Para ver programas por cable o vía satélite, debe hacer coincidir la fuente de entrada de la grabadora (L1)  
con la toma de entrada que está conectada al decodificador de cable o receptor vía satélite (LINE 1 IN).  
Coloque el controlador del decodificador cerca del sensor remoto del decodificador de cable/receptor vía  
satélite.  
Pared  
Controlador  
del  
Decodificadorde  
decodificador  
cable/receptor  
vía satélite  
(suministrado)  
Cable de antena  
(no suministrado)  
AUDIO  
OUT  
R
VIDEO  
OUT  
ANT IN  
TO TV  
L
a la entrada de  
antena  
Televisor  
Cable de audio/video  
(no suministrado)  
LINE  
1
IN  
VIDEO  
a SET TOP  
BOX CONTROL  
SETTOP  
BOX  
CONTROL  
AUDIO  
a la toma  
LINE 1 IN  
Videograbadora-grabadora de DVD  
COMPONENT  
AUDIO OUT  
S
VIDEO OUT LINE  
1
IN LINE OUT  
VIDEO  
VIDEO OUT  
VIDEO  
L
Y
L
R
P
P
B
SETTOP  
BOX  
HDMI OUT  
CONTROL  
R
R
OPTICAL COAXIAL  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT  
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
: Flujo de señales  
ES  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Paso 3: Conexión al televisor  
Conecte el cable de audio/video suministrado a las tomas LINE OUT (VIDEO/AUDIO L/R) de la  
grabadora.  
Para disfrutar de una calidad de imagen superior, conecte un cable de S video (no suministrado) en lugar  
de la clavija amarilla (video). Si utiliza esta conexión, asegúrese de conectar el cable de audio a las tomas  
LINE OUT (AUDIO L/R).  
INPUT  
INPUT  
Televisor o  
proyector  
AUDIO  
S VIDEO  
R
L
VIDEO  
(rojo)  
(blanco) (amarillo)  
Cable de audio/video  
(suministrado)  
S VIDEO OUT LINE 1 IN LINE OUT  
VIDEO VIDEO  
Cable de S video  
(no suministrado)  
(amarillo)  
(blanco)  
(rojo)  
L
R
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
a LINE OUT  
a S VIDEO OUT  
(VIDEO/AUDIO L/R)  
Videograbadora-grabadora de DVD  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO OUT  
AUDIO OUT  
S
VIDEO OUT LINE  
1
IN LINE OUT  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
Y
L
R
P
P
B
R
SETTOP  
BOX  
HDMI OUT  
CONTROL  
R
OPTICAL COAXIAL  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT  
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
: Flujo de señales  
Notas  
• No realice la conexión a la tomas S VIDEO OUT y LINE OUT (VIDEO) amarilla a la vez.  
• Durante la grabación de discos DVD, no es posible visualizar imágenes en VHS mediante la pulsación de VIDEO, ya  
que la toma S VIDEO OUT sólo emitirá señales de DVD video.  
• No conecte las tomas de salida de audio del televisor a las tomas LINE IN (AUDIO L/R) a la vez. De lo contrario, se  
producirá ruido no deseado en los altavoces del televisor.  
ES  
,continúa  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Si el televisor dispone de una toma de entrada de HDMI  
Conecte la toma de salida HDMI* OUT mediante un cable HDMI certificado (no suministrado).  
Disfrutará de imágenes y sonido de alta calidad. El indicador de HDMI se ilumina en el panel frontal  
cuando la grabadora emite señales a través de la toma de salida HDMI OUT.  
Asegúrese de apagar la grabadora antes de conectar un cable HDMI.  
Televisor o  
proyector  
HDMI IN  
a la entrada de HDMI  
Cable HDMI (no suministrado)  
HDMI OUT  
a HDMI OUT  
Videograbadora-grabadora de DVD  
COMPONENT  
AUDIO OUT  
S
VIDEO OUT LINE  
1
IN LINE OUT  
VIDEO  
VIDEO OUT  
Y
VIDEO  
L
L
R
P
P
B
SETTOP  
BOX  
HDMI OUT  
CONTROL  
R
R
OPTICAL COAXIAL  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT  
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
: Flujo de señales  
* Esta grabadora de DVD incorpora la tecnología de High-Definition Multimedia Interface (HDMI™).  
HDMI, el logotipo de HDMI y High-Definition Multimedia Interface son marcas comerciales o marcas comerciales  
registradas de HDMI Licensing LLC.  
Notas  
• No es posible conectar la toma de salida HDMI OUT a tomas DVI que no sean compatibles con HDCP (por ejemplo,  
tomas DVI en pantallas de PC).  
• Durante la grabación de discos DVD, no es posible visualizar imágenes en VHS mediante la pulsación de VIDEO, ya  
que la toma de salida HDMI OUT sólo emitirán señales de DVD video.  
ES  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Si el televisor tiene tomas de entrada de video componente  
Conecte las tomas COMPONENT VIDEO OUT mediante un cable de video componente (no  
suministrado) o tres cables de video (no suministrados) del mismo tipo y longitud. Disfrutará de una fiel  
reproducción del color y de imágenes de alta calidad.  
Si utiliza esta conexión, asegúrese de conectar el cable de audio a las tomas LINE OUT (AUDIO L/R).  
COMPONENT VIDEO IN  
INPUT  
Televisor o  
proyector  
AUDIO  
L
R
Y
PB  
PR  
(verde) (azul) (rojo)  
(blanco) (rojo)  
Cable de audio/video  
(suministrado)  
Cable de video componente  
(no suministrado)  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO OUT  
LINE OUT  
VIDEO  
(verde)  
Y
(blanco)  
(rojo)  
(azul)  
L
P
B
R
(rojo)  
P
R
a LINE OUT  
(AUDIO L/R)  
a COMPONENT  
VIDEO OUT  
AUDIO  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO OUT  
AUDIO OUT  
S
VIDEO OUT LINE  
1
IN LINE OUT  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
Y
L
R
P
P
B
R
SETTOP  
BOX  
HDMI OUT  
CONTROL  
R
OPTICAL COAXIAL  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT  
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
Videograbadora-grabadora de DVD  
: Flujo de señales  
Nota  
Durante la grabación de discos DVD, no es posible visualizar imágenes en VHS mediante la pulsación de VIDEO, ya  
que las tomas COMPONENT VIDEO OUT sólo emitirán señales de DVD video.  
ES  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Paso 4: Conexión del cable Paso 5: Preparación del  
de alimentación  
mando a distancia  
Enchufe los cables de alimentación de la  
grabadora y del televisor a una toma de ca. A  
continuación, debe esperar unos instantes  
antes de utilizar la grabadora. Podrá  
utilizarla sólo después de que la pantalla del panel  
frontal se ilumine y la grabadora pase al modo de  
espera.  
La grabadora puede controlarse con el mando a  
distancia suministrado.  
Inserte dos pilas de tamaño AA (R6) haciendo  
coincidir sus extremos 3 y # con las marcas del  
interior del compartimiento de las pilas.  
Asegúrese de cerrar la tapa de las pilas  
correctamente. Cuando utilice el mando a  
distancia, oriéntelo hacia el sensor remoto  
grabadora.  
de la  
COMPONENT  
AUDIO OUT  
VIDEO OUT  
L
Y
P
P
R
B
R
SETTOP  
BOX  
HDMI OUT  
CONTROL  
OPTICAL COAXIAL  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT  
a la toma de ca <  
Notas  
• Utilice correctamente las pilas para evitar posibles  
daños por fugas y corrosión. No toque el líquido  
directamente con las manos si se produjera alguna  
fuga. Respete las indicaciones siguientes:  
– No utilice una pila nueva con otra usada, ni pilas de  
distintos fabricantes.  
– No intente cargar las pilas.  
– Si no tiene intención de utilizar el mando a distancia  
durante un periodo de tiempo prolongado, extraiga  
las pilas.  
– Si se produce una fuga de las pilas, seque todo líquido  
que haya en el compartimiento de las pilas e inserte  
pilas nuevas.  
• No exponga el sensor remoto (marcado con  
en el  
panel frontal) a luz intensa, tal como la luz directa del  
sol o de aparatos de iluminación. La grabadora podría  
no responder al control del mando a distancia.  
• Con un uso normal, la duración de las pilas es  
aproximadamente de tres a seis meses.  
• No deje el mando a distancia en un lugar  
excesivamente cálido o húmedo.  
• No deje caer ningún objeto extraño dentro de la carcasa  
del mando a distancia, especialmente cuando  
reemplace las pilas.  
ES  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3 Cambie el selector de entrada del televisor  
para que la señal de la grabadora aparezca  
en la pantalla del televisor.  
Paso 6: Configuración fácil  
Aparecerá el siguiente mensaje “Initial setting  
necessary to operate the DVD recorder will be  
made. You can change them later using  
setup.” (“Se realizarán los ajustes iniciales  
necesarios para usar la grabadora DVD. Podrá  
cambiarlos posteriormente utilizando la  
configuración.”).  
• Si no aparece este mensaje, presione  
SYSTEM MENU y seleccione  
“Configuración fácil” en la pantalla  
“Configuración” para ejecutar la  
Siga los pasos que se indican a continuación para  
realizar el mínimo número de ajustes básicos  
necesarios para utilizar la grabadora. Si no  
completa la Configuración fácil, aparecerá cada  
vez que encienda la grabadora.  
Los ajustes se realizan en el orden siguiente.  
Ajuste del idioma de las indicaciones en pantalla  
m
Ajuste del control del decodificador de cable/receptor sat  
Configuración fácil.  
m
4 Presione ENTER.  
Ajuste del reloj  
Aparece la pantalla de configuración que le  
permite seleccionar el idioma utilizado en las  
indicaciones en pantalla.  
m
Ajuste del tipo de televisor  
Easy Setup  
No Disc  
m
Ajuste de la conexión de audio  
Select the screen language.  
m
English  
Français  
Español  
Fin  
"/1  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
Botones  
numéricos  
5 Seleccione un idioma y presione ENTER.  
Aparecerá la pantalla de configuración para el  
control del decodificador de cable/receptor  
vía satélite.  
M/m/</,,  
ENTER  
No Disc Configuración fácil  
O RETURN  
¿Desea controlar el decodificador  
con esta grabadora?  
(Todo cambio al ajuste actual borrará  
los ajustes del temporizador.)  
Sí  
No  
6 Seleccione si se utiliza o no el control del  
decodificador de cable/receptor vía  
satélite; a continuación, presione ENTER.  
Si desea utilizar el control del decodificador  
de cable/receptor vía satélite (página 3),  
seleccione “Sí”.  
1 Encienda el televisor.  
2 Presione "/1.  
La grabadora se enciende.  
De lo contrario, seleccione “No”, y vaya al  
paso 10.  
ES  
,continúa  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
7 Presione los botones numéricos para  
introducir el código de marca del  
decodificador de cable/receptor vía  
satélite.  
10Presione M/m para establecer el mes y  
presione ,.  
Establezca el día, el año, la hora, los minutos  
y AM/PM del mismo modo y, a continuación,  
presione ENTER. El día de la semana se  
ajusta automáticamente.  
Aparecerá la pantalla de configuración para  
seleccionar el tamaño de la imagen del  
televisor conectado.  
Consulte “Cable Box/Satellite Receiver  
Brand Code” en el manual de instrucciones en  
inglés (página 121).  
Configuración fácil  
No Disc  
Introduzca el código de marca  
del decodificador.  
11 Seleccione el ajuste que coincida con su  
tipo de televisor.  
Configuración fácil  
10:10 AM  
No Disc  
Aceptar  
Cancelar  
Seleccione el tipo de pantalla de su TV.  
16 : 9  
4 : 3 Tipo buzón  
4 : 3 Explo pan  
• Para volver a introducir el número del  
código, seleccione “Cancelar” y vuelva al  
paso 6.  
8 Seleccione “Aceptar” y presione ENTER.  
“16:9”: para televisores con pantalla  
panorámica o televisores estándar con modo  
panorámico.  
Configuración fácil  
No Disc  
Seleccione la línea de entrada a  
“4:3 Tipo buzón”: para televisores estándar.  
Muestra imágenes “panorámicas” con franjas  
en las secciones superior e inferior de la  
pantalla.  
la que ha conectado el decodificador.  
Línea1  
Línea2  
“4:3 Explo pan”: para televisores estándar.  
Muestra automáticamente imágenes  
“panorámicas” que ocupan toda la pantalla y  
corta las secciones que no caben.  
9
Seleccione la entrada de audio/video de la  
grabadora (“Línea1” o “Línea2”) que está  
conectada al decodificador de cable/  
receptor vía satélite y, a continuación,  
presione ENTER.  
12 Presione ENTER.  
Aparece la pantalla de configuración para  
seleccionar el tipo de señal Dolby Digital.  
Configuración fácil  
10:10 AM  
No Disc  
Aparecerá la pantalla de configuración para  
ajustar el reloj.  
Dolby Digital  
Configuración fácil  
No Disc  
12:00 AM  
D-PCM  
Dolby Digital  
Ajuste la hora y la fecha manualmente.  
Mes  
01  
Día  
01  
Año  
2007  
Lun  
Hora  
12  
Min  
00  
AM/PM  
AM  
13 Seleccione el tipo de señal Dolby Digital  
que desea enviar al amplificador  
(receptor).  
:
Si el amplificador (receptor) de AV cuenta  
con un decodificador Dolby Digital,  
seleccione “Dolby Digital”. En caso  
contrario, seleccione “D-PCM”.  
ES  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14 Presione ENTER.  
Comprobar el ajuste de control del  
decodificador de cable/receptor vía  
satélite  
Aparece la pantalla de configuración para  
seleccionar el tipo de señal DTS.  
Configuración fácil  
10:10 AM  
No Disc  
1 Encienda la grabadora y el decodificador  
DTS  
de cable/receptor vía satélite.  
Sí  
2 Oriente el mando a distancia de la  
grabadora hacia ésta (no hacia el  
decodificador de cable/receptor vía  
satélite).  
No  
3 Presione CH +/– y compruebe que el canal  
cambia en la ventana del decodificador de  
cable/receptor vía satélite.  
15 Seleccione si desea o no enviar una señal  
DTS al amplificador (receptor), y presione  
ENTER.  
Si el amplificador (receptor) de AV cuenta  
con un decodificador DTS, seleccione “Sí”.  
En caso contrario, seleccione “No”.  
4 Presione los botones numéricos y  
compruebe que el canal cambia en la  
ventana del decodificador de cable/  
receptor vía satélite.  
16 Presione ENTER cuando aparezca  
“Finalizar”.  
Si no consigue que la grabadora controle el  
decodificador de cable/receptor vía satélite  
Vuelva a ejecutar la configuración fácil y  
compruebe los ajustes (página 9).  
Compruebe la conexión y coloque el controlador  
del decodificador cerca del decodificador de  
cable/receptor vía satélite (página 3).  
La Configuración fácil ha finalizado. Se han  
realizado todas las conexiones y operaciones  
de configuración.  
Si utiliza el control de decodificador de cable/  
receptor vía satélite, compruebe que el control  
funciona correctamente (página 11).  
Configuración fácil  
10:10 AM  
No Disc  
Si el decodificador de cable/receptor vía satélite  
sigue sin funcionar correctamente con la  
grabadora, póngase en contacto con la empresa  
suministradora para que le proporcionen un  
decodificador de cable o receptor vía satélite  
compatible.  
Finalizada la configuración fácil.  
Finalizar  
Arreglar el controlador del decodificador para  
el decodificador de cable/receptor vía satélite  
Una vez confirmado que el controlador del  
decodificador controla el decodificador de cable o  
receptor vía satélite, colóquelo en su sitio.  
Para volver a la indicación anterior  
Presione O RETURN.  
1
Coloque la cinta de doble capa suministrada  
en el controlador del decodificador.  
Retire las partes de apoyo de la cinta de doble  
capa.  
z Observación  
Si desea ejecutar la Configuración fácil de nuevo,  
presione SYSTEM MENU y seleccione “Configuración  
fácil” en la pantalla “Configuración”.  
Nota  
Para grabar programas de televisión utilizando el  
temporizador, deberá ajustar el reloj con exactitud.  
ES  
,continúa  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2
Colóquelo de manera que el controlador del  
decodificador esté cerca del sensor de control  
remoto del decodificador de cable/receptor  
vía satélite.  
ES  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
z Observaciones  
• Es posible reproducir DATA CD o DATA DVD con  
pistas de audio en formato MP3 o archivos de imagen  
en formato JPEG.  
Reproducción de DVD  
• Si inserta un DVD VIDEO, VIDEO CD o un CD, la  
reproducción se iniciará automáticamente en función  
del disco.  
• Al reproducir un DVD+RW, DVD-RW, DVD+R,  
DVD-R y DVD-RAM, podrá seleccionar el título del  
menú Lista títulos (página 16).  
Reproducción de discos  
+
RW  
-
-
+
R
-
-
RVideo  
RWVR RWVideo  
RVR  
DVD RAM VCD  
CD  
DATA CD DATA DVD  
• Cuando utilice un DVD-RAM con un cartucho,  
extraiga el disco del mismo.  
Z OPEN/  
CLOSE  
DVD  
1
2
5
8
0
3
Nota  
4
7
6
9
Para reproducir un disco grabado con otro equipo en esta  
grabadora, primero finalice el disco en el equipo de  
grabación.  
TOP MENU  
MENU  
Utilización del menú del DVD  
+
RW  
-
+
R
-
RVideo  
RWVideo  
DVD  
Cuando reproduzca un DVD VIDEO, o un  
DVD+RW, DVD-RW (Modo Video), DVD+R o  
DVD-R (Modo Video) finalizado, podrá acceder  
al menú del disco presionando TOP MENU o  
MENU.  
H PLAY  
x STOP  
1 Presione DVD para utilizar la grabadora de  
DVD.  
2 Presione Z OPEN/CLOSE y coloque un  
disco en la bandeja de discos.  
La cara de reproducción debe mirar  
hacia abajo  
3 Presione Z OPEN/CLOSE para cerrar la  
bandeja de discos.  
Espere hasta que “LOAD” desaparezca de la  
pantalla del panel frontal.  
4 Presione H PLAY.  
Se inicia la reproducción.  
Para detener la reproducción  
Presione x STOP.  
ES  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Opciones de reproducción  
Z OPEN/CLOSE  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
ANGLE  
SUBTITLE  
AUDIO  
REPLAY/  
ADVANCE  
. PREV  
> NEXT  
H PLAY  
X PAUSE  
Botón  
Operación  
Disco  
Z OPEN/CLOSE  
AUDIO  
Detiene la reproducción y abre la bandeja de discos.  
Todos los discos  
Selecciona una de las pistas de audio grabadas en el  
disco cuando se presiona varias veces.  
-
-
RVR  
RWVR  
DVD  
VCD  
-
-
: selecciona el sonido principal o  
RWVR  
RVR  
secundario.  
: selecciona la fuente de audio.  
DVD  
VCD  
: selecciona las pistas de audio estéreo o  
monoaurales.  
.
SUBTITLE  
ANGLE  
Selecciona el idioma de los subtítulos cuando se  
presiona varias veces.  
DVD  
DVD  
Selecciona un ángulo cuando se presiona varias veces.  
Si se grabaron varios ángulos (multiángulo) de una  
escena en el disco, aparece “  
panel frontal.  
” en la pantalla del  
REPLAY/  
ADVANCE  
• Vuelve a reproducir o avanza rápidamente una  
escena si se presiona durante la reproducción.  
• Se desplaza al fotograma anterior o siguiente si se  
presiona en el modo de pausa.  
+
-
-
RWVR RWVideo  
RW  
-
-
RVideo  
+
RVR  
R
RAM  
DVD  
ES  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Botón  
Operación  
Disco  
. PREV/  
NEXT >  
• Se desplaza al principio del título/capítulo/escena/  
pista actual o siguiente e inicia la reproducción  
cuando se presiona durante la reproducción.  
• Se desplaza al principio del título/capítulo/escena/  
pista anterior si se presiona .PREV en los  
3 segundos posteriores al inicio de un título/capítulo/  
escena/pista.  
Todos los discos  
Avanza o retrocede rápidamente el disco cuando se  
presiona durante la reproducción.  
La velocidad de búsqueda cambia cada vez que  
presiona el botón:  
Todos los discos  
(retroceso rápido/  
avance rápido)  
*1  
FF1 con sonido  
(Explorar audio) está  
disponible para DVD  
con pistas de sonido  
Dolby Digital.  
retroceso rápido avance rápido  
*1  
FR1 T t FF1  
*2  
*2  
*2  
FR2 y FF2 no están  
FR2 T T t t FF2  
FR3 T T T t t t FF3  
*3  
*3  
disponibles para  
MP3.  
FR3 y FF3 sólo están  
*3  
disponibles para  
DVD y VIDEO CD.  
Reproduce a cámara lenta cuando se presiona en el  
modo de pausa.  
La velocidad de reproducción cambia cada vez que se  
presiona el botón:  
+
-
-
RWVR RWVideo  
RW  
(lento)  
-
-
RVideo  
+
RVR  
R
*
RAM VCD  
DVD  
* Sólo dirección de  
reproducción  
retroceso a cámara lenta avance a cámara lenta  
T
t
T T t t  
T T T t t t  
X PAUSE  
Hace una pausa en la reproducción.  
Si ésta dura más de cinco minutos, la reproducción se  
inicia automáticamente.  
Todos los discos  
Para reanudar la reproducción normal después de reproducir a diferentes velocidades, presione  
H PLAY.  
ES  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C Información del título:  
Muestra el número del título, su nombre,  
la fecha y el modo de grabación.  
Reproducción de un título  
de la Lista títulos  
” indica que se trata de un título  
protegido, mientras que “ ” indica que  
está desprotegido.  
-
-
RVideo  
+
-
-
+
R
RVR  
RWVR RWVideo  
RW  
RAM  
D Reloj  
El menú Lista títulos muestra los títulos de los  
programas del disco.  
4 Seleccione el título y presione ENTER.  
Aparece el submenú.  
DVD  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
5 Seleccione “Reproducir” y presione  
ENTER.  
La reproducción comienza desde el título  
seleccionado en el disco.  
TOP MENU  
MENU  
ORIGINAL/  
PLAYLIST  
TITLE LIST  
M/m/</,,  
ENTER  
Acerca de las listas de títulos para DVD-RW  
(Modo VR) y DVD-R (Modo VR)  
Es posible cambiar la lista de títulos para que se  
muestre un título original o una Playlist.  
Presione ORIGINAL/PLAYLIST varias veces  
mientras se muestra el menú Lista títulos para  
seleccionar “Lista títulos (Original)” o “Playlist”.  
Para quitar la lista de títulos  
Presione TITLE LIST.  
1 Presione DVD para utilizar la grabadora de  
DVD.  
z Observación  
También es posible cambiar la lista de títulos de  
DVD-RAM para mostrar un original o Playlist.  
2 Coloque un disco en la bandeja de discos.  
3 Presione TITLE LIST.  
Ejemplo: DVD-RW (modo VR)  
Notas  
• La lista de títulos no aparece con DVD-RW (Modo  
Video), DVD+R o DVD-R (Modo Video) que hayan  
finalizado. Para visualizar un título, presione TOP  
MENU o MENU (página 13).  
• Es posible que la lista de títulos no aparezca en discos  
creados en otras grabadoras de DVD.  
Lista títulos (Original)  
1/4 No. Título  
10:10 AM  
Long.  
Edit.  
>
01 LINE 1  
02 LINE 1  
03 LINE 1  
04 LINE 1  
01:29:03  
00:31:23  
01:59:00  
00:58:56  
>
>
>
• Las letras que no pueden mostrarse se reemplazan por  
T
LINE 1  
“ ”.  
*
May/02/2007  
08:00 PM  
A Tipo de disco:  
Muestra el tipo de disco.  
También muestra los tipos de título  
(original o Playlist) para DVD-RW  
(Modo VR), DVD-R (Modo VR) y  
DVD-RAM.  
B Imagen en miniatura de película  
ES  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Modo de grabación y tiempo de grabación  
La siguiente tabla es una guía aproximada del  
tiempo de grabación en un DVD (4,7 GB).  
Grabación de DVD  
Modo de grabación  
Tiempo de  
grabación  
(minutos)  
aproximado  
Antes de grabar  
Antes de empezar la grabación…  
Compruebe que la grabadora está conectada a un  
sintonizador como, por ejemplo, un decodificador  
de cable o receptor vía satélite (página 3).  
Consulte también el manual de instrucciones del  
sintonizador.  
HQ (alta calidad)  
60  
HSP  
R
90  
SP (Modo estándar)  
120  
150  
180  
240  
360  
480  
LSP  
ESP  
LP  
r
r
r
r
Modo de grabación  
Esta grabadora dispone de ocho modos de  
grabación distintos, al igual que los modos de  
grabación SP o EP de las videograbadoras.  
Seleccione el modo de grabación en función del  
tiempo y la calidad de imagen deseada. Por  
ejemplo, si la calidad de la imagen es su principal  
prioridad, seleccione el modo “HQ” (alta calidad).  
Si su principal prioridad es el tiempo de grabación,  
el modo “SLP” puede ser su alternativa.  
EP  
SLP (Larga duración)  
z Observación  
El tiempo de grabación aproximado para los discos  
DVD+R DL (doble capa) es el que se indica a  
continuación:  
HQ: 1 hora y 48 minutos  
HSP: 2 horas y 42 minutos  
SP: 3 horas y 37 minutos  
LSP: 4 horas y 31 minutos  
ESP: 5 horas y 25 minutos  
LP: 7 horas y 14 minutos  
Presione REC MODE varias veces para  
cambiar los modos de grabación.  
EP: 10 horas y 51 minutos  
SLP: 14 horas y 28 minutos  
Deseo grabar con la  
mejor calidad de imagen  
posible, por eso  
seleccionaré HQ.  
Notas  
• En modos de grabación distintos a HQ, la grabadora  
comprime los datos de audio/video antes de la  
grabación. Dado que las escenas de movimientos  
rápidos o la existencia de ruido en la imagen requieren  
que las tasas de compresión disminuyan, el tamaño de  
los datos grabados aumenta y el tiempo de grabación  
disponible se acorta. En la grabación de estas  
imágenes, se recomienda un modo de grabación que  
proporcione un tiempo de grabación más largo.  
• Los siguientes casos pueden producir inexactitudes en  
el tiempo de grabación.  
– Grabación de imágenes con ruido de imagen o  
escenas de movimiento rápido.  
– Grabación de un programa con recepción defectuosa,  
o una fuente de programa o video con imagen de baja  
calidad  
– Grabación en un disco ya editado  
– Grabación de imágenes fijas o sonido únicamente  
• Debido a que el modo de grabación de títulos grabados  
se calcula después del muestreo de datos grabados  
durante la reproducción, es posible que se muestre  
diferente del modo que seleccionó durante la  
grabación. Sin embargo, la grabación real se realizó  
correctamente en el modo seleccionado.  
ES  
,continúa  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Imágenes que no pueden grabarse  
Grabación de DVD desde un  
equipo conectado que no  
tiene temporizador  
En esta grabadora no pueden grabarse imágenes  
con protección contra copias. La grabación se  
detiene cuando se detecta una señal de protección  
contra copias.  
Señales de  
control  
Discos grabables  
+
RW  
-
-
+
R
-
-
RVideo  
RWVR RWVideo  
RVR  
Es posible grabar programas de televisión en la  
grabadora a través del decodificador de cable/  
receptor vía satélite conectado.  
de copias  
Copy-Free  
+
RW  
-
-
RWVR RWVideo  
-
-
RVideo  
+
R
RVR  
Z OPEN/  
CLOSE  
Copy-Once  
-
RWVR  
VIDEO  
CH +/–  
DVD  
Ver.1.1, Ver.1.2 con CPRM*  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
-
RVR  
INPUT  
Ver.2.0, Ver.2.1 con CPRM*  
Copy-Never  
Ninguna  
* El disco grabado sólo puede reproducirse en un equipo  
compatible con CPRM.  
H PLAY  
x STOP  
X PAUSE  
REC MODE  
z REC  
1 Encienda la grabadora y el decodificador  
de cable/receptor vía satélite.  
2 Presione DVD para utilizar la grabadora de  
DVD.  
3 Presione Z OPEN/CLOSE y coloque un  
disco grabable en la bandeja de discos.  
La cara de grabación debe mirar hacia  
abajo  
4 Presione Z OPEN/CLOSE para cerrar la  
bandeja de discos.  
Espere hasta que “LOAD” desaparezca de la  
pantalla del panel frontal.  
ES  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5 Presione CH +/– o INPUT varias veces para  
seleccionar el canal o la fuente de entrada  
que desee grabar.  
Notas  
• Es posible que la grabación no se inicie  
inmediatamente después de presionar z REC.  
• No se puede cambiar el modo de grabación mientras  
graba o durante una pausa de grabación.  
• Si se produce un corte en el suministro eléctrico, se  
eliminará el programa que se está grabando.  
• No es posible cambiar la fuente de entrada durante la  
grabación.  
• Cuando utilice el control de decodificador  
de cable/receptor vía satélite, seleccione el  
canal presionando CH +/– en el mando a  
distancia de esta grabadora. La entrada de la  
grabadora se cambia a la entrada conectada  
(LINE1 o LINE2). También es posible  
utilizar los botones numéricos.  
• Cuando no utilice el control de  
Grabación mediante la función  
Quick Timer (Grabación con  
temporizador presionando un solo  
botón)  
decodificador de cable/receptor vía satélite,  
seleccione la entrada conectada (LINE1 o  
LINE2) presionando INPUT y, a  
continuación, seleccione el canal en el  
decodificador de cable/receptor vía satélite.  
Puede ajustar la grabadora para que grabe en  
incrementos de 30 minutos.  
6 Presione REC MODE varias veces para  
seleccionar el modo de grabación.  
La pantalla cambiará en la pantalla del  
televisor del modo siguiente:  
1 Presione DVD para utilizar la grabadora de  
DVD.  
2 Presione z REC varias veces para definir  
HQ  
HSP  
EP  
SP  
LP  
LSP  
ESP  
la duración.  
Cada vez que presione el botón, aumentará el  
tiempo en 30 minutos, hasta un máximo de  
ocho horas*.  
SLP  
Para obtener más detalles sobre el modo de  
grabación, consulte la página 17.  
(Grabación  
normal)  
0:30  
1:00  
7:30 8:00  
7 Presione z REC.  
Comienza la grabación.  
c” y “OTR” se iluminan y el tiempo de  
grabación restante aparece en la pantalla del  
panel frontal.  
La grabación continúa hasta que usted la  
detiene o el disco se llena.  
Deje el decodificador de cable/receptor vía  
satélite encendido y no cambie el canal que  
está grabando.  
Cuando el contador llega a “0:00”, la  
grabadora detiene la grabación y se apaga.  
* 14 horas 30 minutos para discos DVD+R DL (doble  
capa).  
Para detener la grabación  
Presione x STOP.  
Tenga en cuenta que la grabadora demora algunos  
segundos en detener la grabación.  
Para cancelar el Quick Timer  
Presione z REC varias veces hasta que aparezca  
el contador en la pantalla del panel frontal. La  
grabadora vuelve al modo de grabación normal.  
Para hacer una pausa en la grabación  
Presione X PAUSE.  
Para detener la grabación  
Para reiniciar la grabación, presione X PAUSE de  
nuevo.  
Presione x STOP dos veces.  
Tenga en cuenta que la grabadora demora algunos  
segundos en detener la grabación.  
Para ver una cinta VHS durante la grabación  
Presione VIDEO para utilizar la videograbadora,  
inserte una cinta y, a continuación, presione  
H PLAY.  
ES  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Presione Z OPEN/CLOSE para cerrar la  
bandeja de discos.  
Grabación con  
Espere hasta que “LOAD” desaparezca de la  
pantalla del panel frontal.  
temporizador de DVD desde  
4 Presione TIMER.  
un equipo conectado  
Temporizador – Estándar  
10:10 AM  
+
-
-
+
R
-
-
RVideo  
RWVR RWVideo  
RVR  
RW  
No ec T
No.01  
01
at
at  
n
ore oe Edit.  
Puede ajustar el temporizador para un total de  
12 programas utilizando la grabación de DVD con  
temporizador y la grabación de videograbadora  
con temporizador con un máximo de un mes de  
anticipación.  
02Sop. Fecha InicioFin  
Can  
Modo  
03
DVD  
Hoy  
09 00  
:
10 : 00  
Línea1  
SP  
PM  
PM  
04
05
06
Tenga en cuenta que el tiempo de grabación  
continua máximo de un único título es de 12 horas.  
El contenido que supere este tiempo no se grabará.  
5 Seleccione un elemento utilizando </,  
Nota  
y ajústelo utilizando M/m.  
No opere el decodificador de cable ni el receptor vía  
satélite justo antes ni durante una grabación con  
temporizador, ya que ello puede impedir la grabación  
correcta de un programa.  
A “Sop.”: seleccione “DVD”.  
B “Fecha”: ajusta la fecha mediante M.  
Para grabar el mismo programa todos los  
días o el mismo día todas las semanas,  
presione m.  
Z OPEN/  
CLOSE  
DVD  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
El elemento cambia de la siguiente  
manera:  
Hoy yDom-Sáb (de domingo a sábado)  
y Lun-Sáb (de lunes a sábado) y  
Lun-Vie (de lunes a viernes) y  
Dom (todos los domingos) y  
Lun (todos los lunes) y y  
Sáb (todos los sábados) y  
SYSTEM  
MENU  
TIMER  
M/m/</,,  
ENTER  
1 mes más tarde y y Hoy  
C “Inicio”: establece la hora de inicio.  
x STOP  
D “Fin”: establece la hora de finalización.  
E “Can”: selecciona el canal o la fuente  
de entrada.  
• Cuando utilice el control de  
decodificador de cable/receptor vía  
satélite, seleccione el canal.  
1 Presione DVD para utilizar la grabadora de  
DVD.  
• Cuando no utilice el control de  
decodificador de cable/receptor vía  
satélite, seleccione la entrada, LINE1 o  
LINE2. Seleccione el canal en el  
decodificador de cable/receptor vía  
satélite conectado antes de iniciar la  
grabación con temporizador.  
2 Presione Z OPEN/CLOSE y coloque un  
disco grabable en la bandeja de discos.  
La cara de grabación debe mirar hacia  
abajo  
ES  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
F “Modo”: selecciona el modo de  
grabación (página 17).  
Para utilizar la función Ajustar modo  
grab. (página 21), seleccione “AUTO”.  
Si se equivoca, seleccione el elemento y  
cambie el ajuste.  
6 Presione ENTER.  
Aparecerá el menú Lista de temporizador.  
Se ilumina el indicador c en la pantalla del  
panel frontal, y la grabadora está lista para  
comenzar a grabar.  
• Si parpadea el indicador c en la pantalla del  
panel frontal, compruebe que hay un disco  
grabable insertado y que en el disco hay  
suficiente espacio para la grabación.  
7 Presione SYSTEM MENU para quitar el  
menú.  
No es necesario apagar la grabadora antes de  
que empiece la grabación con temporizador.  
Deje el decodificador de cable/receptor vía  
satélite encendido y no cambie el canal  
seleccionado hasta que la grabadora finalice la  
grabación con temporizador.  
Para detener la grabación  
Presione x STOP dos veces.  
Tenga en cuenta que la grabadora demora algunos  
segundos en detener la grabación.  
Para utilizar la función Ajustar modo grab.  
Si el espacio restante en el disco no es suficiente  
para realizar la grabación actual, la grabadora  
ajustará el modo de grabación automáticamente.  
Seleccione “AUTO” en “Modo” al ajustar el  
temporizador.  
Notas  
• Aunque lo ajuste correctamente, es posible que el  
programa no se grabe si se está realizando otra  
grabación o si se superpone otro ajuste de temporizador  
con prioridad.  
• Antes de comenzar la grabación con temporizador,  
“TIMER REC” parpadea en la pantalla del panel  
frontal.  
• La grabadora se apaga automáticamente cuando  
finaliza una grabación con temporizador, incluso  
aunque la grabación comenzase con la grabadora  
encendida.  
• La grabadora no graba programas con señales Copy-  
Never. Este tipo de grabaciones se detienen al cabo de  
unos segundos.  
ES  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Para detener la reproducción  
Presione x STOP.  
Reproducción de la videograbadora  
Para expulsar la cinta  
Presione Z OPEN/CLOSE.  
Reproducción de una cinta  
VHS  
Para desconectar la alimentación durante el  
rebobinado (parada del rebobinado)  
Presione "/1 mientras la cinta se está  
rebobinando. La alimentación se desactivará pero  
la cinta seguirá rebobinándose hasta que llegue al  
final.  
Z OPEN/  
"/1  
VIDEO  
CLOSE  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
Para emplear el contador de tiempo  
Presione CLEAR en el punto que desee localizar  
más tarde. El contador en la pantalla del panel  
frontal se restablece a “0:00:00”.  
Para mostrar el contador en la pantalla del  
televisor, presione DISPLAY.  
DISPLAY  
CLEAR  
Notas  
H PLAY  
• Durante la reproducción, la videograbadora detecta  
automáticamente el sistema de grabación (S-VHS/  
VHS) y el modo de grabación (SP o EP) de la cinta. Las  
grabaciones en modo LP realizadas en otros equipos se  
reproducirán, pero no se garantiza una buena calidad de  
la imagen.  
x STOP  
• El contador se restablecerá a “0:00:00” siempre que se  
vuelva a insertar una cinta.  
• El contador deja de contar cuando llega a una parte sin  
grabación.  
• El contador se restablecerá a “0:00:00” una vez  
transcurridas diez horas y se inicia de nuevo la cuenta.  
• Si cambia al modo de videograbadora durante la  
reproducción de un disco, la reproducción del DVD se  
detendrá.  
• La videograbadora no graba en formato S-VHS; sin  
embargo, reproducirá las cintas S-VHS al detectar  
automáticamente el formato, aunque la calidad de la  
imagen será peor de lo normal en S-VHS. Es posible  
que la imagen no resulte clara si se utilizan opciones de  
reproducción tales como la cámara lenta, etc.  
• No se garantiza la reproducción de las cintas S-VHS  
grabadas en modo EP (×3).  
1 Presione VIDEO para utilizar la  
videograbadora.  
2 Inserte una cinta.  
La reproducción comienza automáticamente  
si inserta una cinta a la que se le ha quitado la  
lengüeta de protección.  
• La videograbadora no es compatible con el sistema de  
color PAL o SECAM. Sólo es posible reproducir cintas  
NTSC.  
3 Presione H PLAY.  
La pantalla del panel frontal muestra el tiempo  
de reproducción.  
Cuando la cinta llegue al final, se rebobinará  
automáticamente.  
ES  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Opciones de reproducción  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
REPLAY/  
ADVANCE  
. PREV  
> NEXT  
H PLAY  
X PAUSE  
Botón  
Operación  
• Avanza o retrocede rápidamente si se presiona durante el modo de detención.  
Si mantiene presionado el botón durante el avance o retroceso rápido, podrá ver la  
imagen.  
• Reproduce a alta velocidad cuando se presiona brevemente durante la reproducción.  
Si mantiene presionado el botón durante la reproducción, ésta continúa a alta  
velocidad hasta que se suelta el botón.  
(retroceso  
rápido/avance  
rápido)  
Reproduce a cámara lenta cuando se presiona en el modo de pausa.  
(lento)  
ADVANCE  
• Avanza un fotograma cada vez que se presiona en modo de pausa.  
• Avanza rápidamente la escena actual durante 30 segundos cuando se presiona  
*1  
durante la reproducción.  
*2  
REPLAY  
Vuelve a reproducir la escena anterior cuando se presiona durante la reproducción.  
. PREV/  
NEXT >  
Presiónelo durante la reproducción. La velocidad de reproducción cambia cada vez que  
se presiona el botón:  
–×7  
y
–×5  
y
–×3  
y
PAUSE  
y
SLOW y PLAY y ×2  
y
×3  
y
×5  
y
×7  
X PAUSE  
Hace una pausa en la reproducción.  
Si ésta dura más de cinco minutos, la reproducción se inicia automáticamente.  
*1  
*2  
Puede presionarse hasta cuatro veces para avanzar  
aproximadamente dos minutos.  
Durante 10 segundos en modo SP o LP/ durante  
Notas  
• El sonido se enmudece durante la reproducción a varias  
velocidades.  
15 segundos en modo EP.  
• Es posible que aparezca ruido durante la reproducción  
inversa a alta velocidad.  
Para reanudar la reproducción normal, presione  
H PLAY.  
ES  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Notas  
• Las cintas grabadas en modo EP (×3) con esta  
videograbadora no pueden reproducirse en pletinas de  
video VHS que sólo tengan modo SP.  
Grabación de la videograbadora  
Antes de grabar  
• Cuando se reproduzcan cintas grabadas en el modo  
EP (×3) con esta videograbadora en otras pletinas de  
video VHS con el modo EP, es posible que aparezca  
ruido en la imagen.  
Antes de empezar la grabación…  
Compruebe que la grabadora está conectada a un  
sintonizador como, por ejemplo, un decodificador  
de cable o receptor vía satélite (página 3).  
Consulte también el manual de instrucciones del  
sintonizador.  
Nota  
La grabadora dispone de función de protección contra  
copia. Los programas que incluyen señales de protección  
contra copias del tipo Copy-Never no pueden grabarse  
correctamente en la videograbadora.  
Para proteger grabaciones contra el borrado  
Para evitar borrados accidentales, rompa la  
lengüeta de seguridad como muestra la ilustración.  
Para volver a grabar en la cinta, cubra el orificio de  
la lengüeta con cinta adhesiva.  
Lengüeta de seguridad  
Modo de grabación  
Los modos “EP” (reproducción extendida) y “SP”  
(reproducción estándar) están disponibles en el  
modo de grabación (velocidad de cinta). El modo  
“EP” proporciona un tiempo de grabación tres  
veces superior a la duración del modo “SP”. No  
obstante, se obtiene una mejor calidad de imagen  
y sonido con el modo “SP”.  
Tiempo máximo de grabación  
Longitud de  
cinta  
SP  
EP  
T-120  
T-160  
2 horas  
6 horas  
8 horas  
2 horas y  
40 minutos  
T-180  
3 horas  
9 horas  
ES  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4 Presione CH +/– o INPUT varias veces para  
seleccionar el canal o la fuente de entrada  
que desee grabar.  
Grabación de la  
videograbadora desde un  
equipo conectado que no  
tiene temporizador  
• Cuando utilice el control de decodificador  
de cable/receptor vía satélite, seleccione el  
canal presionando CH +/– en el mando a  
distancia de esta grabadora. La entrada de la  
grabadora se cambia a la entrada conectada  
(LINE1 o LINE2). También es posible  
utilizar los botones numéricos.  
• Cuando no utilice el control de  
Es posible grabar programas de televisión en la  
grabadora a través del decodificador de cable/  
receptor vía satélite conectado.  
decodificador de cable/receptor vía satélite,  
seleccione la entrada conectada (LINE1 o  
LINE2) presionando INPUT y, a  
continuación, seleccione el canal en el  
decodificador de cable/receptor vía satélite.  
DVD  
VIDEO  
CH +/–  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
5 Presione REC MODE varias veces para  
seleccionar el modo de grabación, “SP” o  
“EP”.  
INPUT  
Para obtener más detalles sobre el modo de  
grabación, consulte la página 24.  
6 Presione z REC.  
Aparece “REC” en la pantalla del panel  
frontal y se inicia la grabación.  
Deje el decodificador de cable/receptor vía  
satélite encendido y no cambie el canal que  
está grabando.  
H PLAY  
x STOP  
X PAUSE  
REC MODE  
z REC  
Para detener la grabación  
Presione x STOP.  
Para hacer una pausa en la grabación  
Presione X PAUSE.  
Para reiniciar la grabación, presione X PAUSE de  
nuevo.  
Si hace una pausa en la grabación de más de cinco  
minutos, ésta se detiene automáticamente.  
1 Encienda la grabadora y el decodificador  
de cable/receptor vía satélite.  
2 Presione VIDEO para utilizar la  
videograbadora.  
Para ver un DVD durante la grabación  
Presione DVD para utilizar la grabadora, inserte  
un disco y, a continuación, presione H PLAY.  
3 Inserte una cinta provista de lengüeta de  
seguridad.  
z Observaciones  
• La información de la cinta visualizada en la pantalla del  
televisor no se grabará en la cinta.  
• Es posible apagar el televisor durante la grabación.  
ES  
,continúa  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Notas  
Grabación con  
• No es posible cambiar el modo de grabación, el canal  
ni la fuente de entrada durante la grabación.  
• Si inserta una cinta a la que se haya quitado la lengüeta  
de seguridad, ésta se expulsará cuando presione  
z REC.  
temporizador de  
videograbadora desde un  
equipo conectado  
Grabación mediante la función  
Quick Timer (Grabación con  
temporizador presionando un solo  
botón)  
Puede ajustar el temporizador para un total de  
12 programas utilizando la grabación de DVD con  
temporizador y la grabación de videograbadora  
con temporizador con un máximo de un mes de  
anticipación.  
Puede ajustar la grabadora para que grabe en  
incrementos de 30 minutos.  
1 Presione VIDEO para utilizar la  
videograbadora.  
Nota  
No opere el decodificador de cable ni el receptor vía  
satélite justo antes ni durante una grabación con  
temporizador, ya que ello puede impedir la grabación  
correcta de un programa.  
2 Presione z REC varias veces para definir  
la duración.  
Cada vez que se presione el botón, el tiempo  
aumentará en 30 minutos, hasta un máximo de  
seis horas.  
VIDEO  
(Grabación  
normal)  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
0:30  
1:00  
5:30 6:00  
c” y “OTR” se iluminan y el tiempo de  
grabación restante aparece en la pantalla del  
panel frontal.  
Cuando el contador llega a “0:00”, la  
grabadora detiene la grabación y se apaga.  
SYSTEM  
MENU  
TIMER  
M/m/</,,  
ENTER  
Para cancelar el Quick Timer  
x STOP  
Presione z REC varias veces hasta que aparezca  
el contador en la pantalla del panel frontal. La  
grabadora vuelve al modo de grabación normal.  
Para detener la grabación  
Presione x STOP dos veces.  
1 Presione VIDEO para utilizar la  
videograbadora.  
2 Inserte una cinta provista de lengüeta de  
seguridad.  
ES  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3 Presione TIMER.  
5 Presione ENTER.  
Aparecerá el menú Lista de temporizador. Se  
ilumina el indicador c en la pantalla del panel  
frontal, y la grabadora está lista para  
comenzar a grabar.  
Temporizador – Estándar  
10:10 AM  
N
No.01  
0
Edit.  
0Sop. FechaInicioFin  
Can  
Modo  
• Si el indicador c parpadea en la pantalla del  
panel frontal, compruebe que ha insertado  
una cinta con la lengüeta de seguridad  
intacta.  
0
VCR  
Hoy  
09 00  
:
10 : 00  
Línea1  
SP  
PM  
PM  
0
0
0
6 Presione SYSTEM MENU para quitar el  
menú.  
No es necesario apagar la grabadora antes de  
que empiece la grabación con temporizador.  
Deje el decodificador de cable/receptor vía  
satélite encendido y no cambie el canal  
seleccionado hasta que la grabadora finalice la  
grabación con temporizador.  
4 Seleccione un elemento utilizando </,  
y ajústelo utilizando M/m.  
A “Sop.”: seleccione “VCR.”  
B “Fecha”: ajusta la fecha mediante M.  
Para grabar el mismo programa todos los  
días o el mismo día todas las semanas,  
presione m.  
Para detener la grabación  
Presione x STOP dos veces.  
El elemento cambia de la siguiente  
manera:  
Hoy yDom-Sáb (de domingo a sábado)  
y Lun-Sáb (de lunes a sábado) y  
Lun-Vie (de lunes a viernes) y  
Dom (todos los domingos) y  
Lun (todos los lunes) y y  
Sáb (todos los sábados) y  
Para utilizar la función Ajustar modo grab.  
Si la longitud restante de la cinta es demasiado  
corta para la grabación actual, la videograbadora  
cambiará automáticamente el modo de grabación  
de SP a EP.  
Cuando ajuste el temporizador, seleccione  
“AUTO” en “Modo”. Presione SYSTEM MENU  
y ajuste “Longitud de cinta” - “Función  
videograbadora” de “Opciones” en la pantalla  
“Configuración”.  
1 mes más tarde y y Hoy  
C “Inicio”: establece la hora de inicio.  
D “Fin”: establece la hora de finalización.  
E “Can”: selecciona el canal o la fuente  
de entrada.  
Notas  
• Aunque lo ajuste correctamente, es posible que el  
programa no se grabe si se está realizando otra  
grabación o si se superpone otro ajuste de temporizador  
con prioridad.  
• No es posible grabar en una cinta a la que se le haya  
quitado la lengüeta de seguridad.  
• Antes de comenzar la grabación con temporizador,  
“TIMER REC” parpadea en la pantalla del panel  
frontal.  
• La grabadora se apaga automáticamente cuando  
finaliza una grabación con temporizador, incluso  
aunque la grabación comenzase con la grabadora  
encendida.  
• Cuando utilice el control de  
decodificador de cable/receptor vía  
satélite, seleccione el canal.  
• Cuando no utilice el control de  
decodificador de cable/receptor vía  
satélite, seleccione la entrada, LINE1 o  
LINE2. Seleccione el canal en el  
decodificador de cable/receptor vía  
satélite conectado antes de iniciar la  
grabación con temporizador.  
F “Modo”: selecciona el modo de  
grabación; “SP” o “EP”. Para utilizar la  
función Ajustar modo grab.  
(página 27), seleccione “AUTO”.  
Si se equivoca, seleccione el elemento y  
cambie el ajuste.  
ES  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1 Presione DVD e inserte un disco grabable.  
Para seleccionar el modo de grabación,  
presione REC MODE varias veces (consulte  
Copiado (CINTA y DVD)  
Copiado de una cinta VHS a  
un DVD  
2 Inserte una cinta VHS de origen.  
3 Presione VIDEO para utilizar la  
videograbadora.  
+
-
-
+
R
-
-
RVideo  
RWVR RWVideo  
RVR  
RW  
4 Inicie la reproducción de la cinta VHS y, a  
continuación, presione x STOP o  
X PAUSE en el punto en el que desee  
iniciar el proceso de copiado.  
Puede grabar (copiar) fácilmente una cinta VHS  
en un disco. Antes de hacerlo, realice los ajustes de  
audio necesarios en la videograbadora.  
Para seleccionar el sonido de la  
videograbadora, presione AUDIO durante la  
reproducción.  
DVD  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
5 Presione T VIDEO en la grabadora.  
Comienza el copiado.  
SYSTEM  
MENU  
Para detener el copiado  
Presione x STOP.  
M/m/</,,  
ENTER  
Tenga en cuenta que la grabadora demora algunos  
segundos en detener el copiado.  
H PLAY  
Para copiar mediante el menú en pantalla  
x STOP  
1
Después de realizar el paso 4 descrito  
anteriormente, presione SYSTEM MENU.  
X PAUSE  
REC MODE  
2
Seleccione “Copiado” del menú del sistema y  
presione ENTER.  
Copiado  
10:10 AM  
Lista títulos  
Temporizador  
Copiado sencillo  
Copiado de programas  
Copiado DV/D8  
Editar  
TVIDEO  
Copiado  
Ajuste del disco  
Configuración  
3
Seleccione “Copiado sencillo” y presione  
ENTER.  
Copiado  
10:10 AM  
Lista títulos  
Temporizador  
Editar  
Copiado sencillo  
VIDEO --> DVD  
DVD --> VIDEO  
Copiado de programas  
Copiado DV/D8  
Copiado  
Ajuste del disco  
Configuración  
ES  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
4
5
Seleccione “VIDEO t DVD” y presione  
ENTER.  
La pantalla solicita confirmación.  
Copiado de un DVD a una  
cinta VHS  
Seleccione “Sí” y presione ENTER.  
Comienza el copiado.  
+
RW  
-
-
+
R
-
-
RVideo  
RWVR RWVideo  
RVR  
DVD RAM  
z Observaciones  
• Si aparece una pantalla negra (sin señal) al final del  
disco copiado, no se trata de un mal funcionamiento.  
Esta pantalla se graba si existen diferencias entre el  
tiempo del disco y de la cinta al detener la grabación.  
• En el proceso de copiado de una cinta VHS a un DVD,  
es posible que la lectura del contador de la cinta VHS  
difiera ligeramente del tiempo de grabación del DVD.  
• Durante el copiado, se emite el sonido de reproducción  
de la videograbadora.  
Es posible grabar (copiar) un título de DVD a una  
cinta VHS. Tenga en cuenta que cuando graba  
software protegido contra copias a una cinta, es  
posible que la imagen aparezca desestabilizada al  
reproducir la cinta.  
Antes de realizar el copiado, efectúe los ajustes de  
audio necesarios en la grabadora de DVD.  
Notas  
DVD  
VIDEO  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
• El copiado no podrá realizarse si:  
– utiliza un DVD no grabable.  
– utiliza un software VHS con funciones de protección  
contra copia.  
• El copiado se detiene cuando:  
– la cinta VHS alcanza el final y se detiene.  
– la pletina de video VHS o la pletina de DVD se  
detiene.  
SUBTITLE  
AUDIO  
TOP MENU  
SYSTEM  
MENU  
TITLE LIST  
M/m/</,,  
ENTER  
– se agota el tiempo restante del disco.  
• El menú del sistema, el menú OPTIONS y la pantalla  
de información no se muestran durante el proceso de  
copiado.  
x STOP  
X PAUSE  
REC MODE  
• Derechos de autor  
– Las grabaciones realizadas de cintas VHS y otros  
materiales con derechos de autor son únicamente para  
disfrute individual, y cualquier otro uso no autorizado  
está prohibido por las leyes de los derechos de autor.  
– La edición no autorizada de material protegido por  
los derechos de autor está prohibida por las leyes de  
los derechos de autor.  
DVDt  
1 Presione VIDEO e inserte una cinta VHS  
con la lengüeta de seguridad colocada en  
su sitio.  
Para seleccionar el modo de grabación, SP o  
EP, presione REC MODE varias veces  
ES  
,continúa  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4
5
Seleccione “DVD t VIDEO” y presione  
ENTER.  
La pantalla solicita confirmación.  
2 Inserte un disco de origen.  
3 Presione DVD para utilizar la grabadora de  
DVD.  
Seleccione “Sí” y presione ENTER.  
Comienza el copiado.  
4 Presione TOP MENU o TITLE LIST para  
seleccionar un título.  
Si aparece el menú del disco al finalizar la  
reproducción del DVD, presione x STOP  
para detener el proceso de copiado ya que, de  
lo contrario, el menú del disco quedará  
grabado hasta que la cinta llegue al final.  
5 Inicie la reproducción del DVD y, a  
continuación, presione x STOP o  
X PAUSE en el punto en el que desee  
iniciar el proceso de copiado.  
Para seleccionar el sonido, idioma o los  
subtítulos del DVD, presione AUDIO o  
SUBTITLE durante la reproducción (consulte  
z Observaciones  
• Es posible que el brillo de la imagen de reproducción  
varíe del de la reproducción de DVD normal.  
• Es posible que el tiempo de reproducción del DVD  
difiera ligeramente de la lectura del contador de la cinta  
VHS.  
6 Presione DVD t en la grabadora.  
Comienza el copiado.  
• El sonido que se reproduce (principal, secundario, etc.)  
es el sonido copiado.  
Para detener el copiado  
Presione x STOP.  
Notas  
• El copiado se detiene cuando:  
Tenga en cuenta que la grabadora demora algunos  
segundos en detener el copiado.  
– el DVD se reproduce hasta el final y se detiene.  
– la pletina de video VHS o la pletina de DVD se  
detiene.  
– se agota el tiempo restante de la cinta.  
• El menú del sistema, el menú OPTIONS y la pantalla  
de información no se muestran durante el proceso de  
copiado.  
Para copiar mediante el menú en pantalla  
1
Después de realizar el paso 5 descrito  
anteriormente, presione SYSTEM MENU.  
2
Seleccione “Copiado” del menú del sistema y  
presione ENTER.  
• Derechos de autor  
– Las grabaciones realizadas de discos y otros  
materiales con derechos de autor son únicamente para  
disfrute individual, y cualquier otro uso no autorizado  
está prohibido por las leyes de los derechos de autor.  
– La edición no autorizada de material protegido por  
los derechos de autor está prohibida por las leyes de  
los derechos de autor.  
Copiado  
10:10 AM  
Lista títulos  
Copiado sencillo  
Copiado de programas  
Copiado DV/D8  
Temporizador  
Editar  
Copiado  
Ajuste del disco  
Configuración  
3
Seleccione “Copiado sencillo” y presione  
ENTER.  
Copiado  
10:10 AM  
Lista títulos  
Temporizador  
Editar  
Copiado sencillo  
VIDEO --> DVD  
DVD --> VIDEO  
Copiado de programas  
Copiado DV/D8  
Copiad  
Ajuste del disco  
Configuración  
ES  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sony Corporation Printed in China  
AK68-01326A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Sharp Flat Panel Television LB T422U User Manual
SIIG Video Gaming Accessories 04 0698B User Manual
Silex technology Network Router SX ND4050G User Manual
Snapper Tiller 8 0899 User Manual
Sony CD Player CDP CE500 User Manual
Sony Microcassette Recorder ICD BM1VTP User Manual
Sony Stereo Amplifier TA FA30ES User Manual
Sony VCR SLV X9D E User Manual
Star Micronics Printer TSP2000 Series User Manual
Sunbeam Wok WW4500D User Manual